BA01478D/06/EN/02.17
71389265

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.01.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promag P 300
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Electromagnetic flowmeter

Keep cover

Sp a
nnu

ng

öff
ne

n

hile
tw
gh

ti

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.1
1.2

6.1

6.3

Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.2 Requirements from environment andprocess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 25
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 25
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 29
6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 30
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

7Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2

Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 10

7.1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 12
2.7.3 Access via fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.7.4 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3

6.2

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

7.4

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

7.5
7.6

Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 31
7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.4 Device plugs available . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug . . . . . . 33
7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 33
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 34
7.2.2 Connecting remote display andoperating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 37
Ensure potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.2 Connection example, standard
scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.3 Connection example in special
situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 42
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

8.1
8.2

5

Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.1
5.2

Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 44
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 52
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 54
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 54
8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 56

5.3

Endress+Hauser

7.2

7.3

8.3

3

Table of contents

8.4

8.5

8.3.10 User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Access to the operating menu via the Webbrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 60
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 64
8.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370 . . . . . . . 66
8.5.3 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.5.4 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.5.5 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.5.6 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . 69

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.6.4 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 102
10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 104
10.6.8 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorizedaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 110
10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
10.8.3 Write protection via block
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

11

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

9

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

9.1

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 70
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 70
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
9.2.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
9.2.2 Assignment of the measured values
in the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.2.3 Execution times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9.2.4 Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 113
11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 113
11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 114
11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 115
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

12

9.2

10

10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 75
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.5.3 Configuring the analog inputs . . . . . . 80
10.5.4 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 80
10.5.5 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 81
10.5.6 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 82
10.5.7 Configuring the current output . . . . . 83
10.5.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
10.5.9 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . . 91
10.5.10 Configuring the local display . . . . . . . 92
10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . . 94
10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection . . . 96
10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter theaccess code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . . 98
4

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 122

12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 125
12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 127
12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 127
12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 128
12.5 Diagnostic information in DeviceCare or
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 129
12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 130
12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 130
12.6.2 Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . 130
12.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 134
12.7.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.7.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 136
12.7.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 143
12.7.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12.9 Diagnostic messages in the DIAGNOSTIC
Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.10 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.11 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.11.1 Event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 156
12.11.3 Overview of information events . . . . 157
12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.12.1 Function scope of the "Restart"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

13

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

13.1

13.2
13.3

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.1.3 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

14

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

14.1

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 162
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 162
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 163
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 163

14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 165
Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Table of contents

16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
16.11 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Endress+Hauser

5Document information

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1

Document information

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phasesof the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance andstorage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through totroubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols used

1.2.1

Safety symbols
SymbolMeaning

DANGERDANGER!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will
result in serious or fatal injury.

WARNINGWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in serious or fatal injury.

CAUTIONCAUTION!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in minor or medium injury.

NOTICENOTE!
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
Equipotential connection
A connection that has to be connected to the plant grounding system: This may be apotential equalization line or a star grounding system depending on national orcompany codes of practice.

1.2.3

Communication symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
BluetoothWireless data transmission between devices over a short distance.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

SymbolDocument information

Meaning
LED
Light emitting diode is off.
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Flat blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
Reference to pageA

Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps
Result of a step
Help in the event of a problem
Visual inspection

1.2.6

Endress+Hauser

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3,...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections7

Document information

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

SymbolMeaning-

Hazardous area.

Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The W@M Device Viewer : Enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplateor scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.
For a detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code→  193

1.3.1

Standard documentation

Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification• Storage and transport• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating
Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing themeasuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description• Installation• Electrical connection• Operation options• System integration• Commissioning• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters

1.3.2

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed atthose who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1.4

Document information

Registered trademarks

FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus
Registration-pending trademark of the FieldComm Group, Austin, Texas, USA
Applicator®, FieldCare®, DeviceCare ®, Field XpertTM, HistoROM®, Heartbeat
TechnologyTM
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of the Endress+Hauser Group

Endress+Hauser

9Basic safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2

Basic safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in these Brief Operating Instructions is intended only forflow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is anincreased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for theintended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the measuring device is not operated at atmospheric temperature, compliance withthe relevant basic conditions specified in the associated device documentation isabsolutely essential: "Documentation" section.→  8.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

10

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Basic safety instructions

NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks

LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents aburn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.

2.3

Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
For welding work on the piping:‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4

Operational safety

Risk of injury.

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability,‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

Endress+Hauser

11Basic safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.6

IT security

We only provide a warranty if the device is installed and used as described in the
Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect itagainst any inadvertent changes to the device settings.
IT security measures in line with operators' security standards and designed to provide
additional protection for the device and device data transfer must be implemented by theoperators themselves.

2.7

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to theparameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  111.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.
• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Is equivalent to hardware write protection interms of functionality.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  110).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  65) which can be ordered as an option is protected by the
network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the IEEE 802.11
standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  104).

12

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Basic safety instructions

General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  110

2.7.3

Access via fieldbus

When communicating via fieldbus, access to the device parameters can be restricted to"Read only" access. The option can be changed in the Fieldbus writing access parameter.
This does not affect cyclic measured value transmission to the higher-order system, whichis always guaranteed.
For detailed information, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document
pertaining to the device →  194

2.7.4

Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or the WLAN interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document
pertaining to the device →  194

Endress+Hauser

13

Product description

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

3

Product description

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1

Product design
2

1

4

3

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

i sp

la y

e

D

Nicht

I/O

ar
ES

C

–
+
E

5
A0029586

1
1
2
3
4
5

14

Important components of a measuring device
Connection compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Electronics compartment coverSensorEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

A0028673

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?
A0028673

A0028673

Do the nameplate data
match the ordering
information on the delivery
note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the CD-ROM with theTechnical Documentation(depends on device version)and documents present?

A0028673• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  16.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the measuring device:• Nameplate specifications• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in W@M Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the measuring device isdisplayed.
• Enter the serial number from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations App
or scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser
Operations App: all the information for the measuring device is displayed.
Endress+Hauser

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The chapters "Additional standard documentation on the device" →  8 and"Supplementary device-dependent documentation" →  8• The W@M Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate
1 2

3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

20

6

19
7
18
17
16
15
14

8
i

i

Date:

13

12

11

9

10
A0029192

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

16

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Manufacturing location
Name of the transmitter
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Degree of protection
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Permitted temperature range for cable
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)Information on cable gland
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

4.2.2

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Sensor nameplate
1

2
3
4
5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

6

7
13
8

i

i

9

Date:

12

11

10
A0029205

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Example of sensor nameplate
Name of the sensor
Manufacturing location
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; fluid temperature
range; material of liner and electrodes
Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation →  194
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Flow direction
CE mark, C-Tick
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE+).

Endress+Hauser

17

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3
SymbolProline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Symbols on measuring device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5

Storage and transport

5.1

Storage conditions

Storage and transport

Observe the following notes for storage:• Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
• Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.
• Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the lining.
• Store in a dry and dust-free place.
• Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature →  177

5.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They
prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.

5.2.1

Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

Endress+Hauser

19

Storage and transport

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.2.2

Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3

Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

LCAUTION
Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing.
‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

A0029319

5.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable:• Measuring device secondary packaging: polymer stretch film that conforms to EC
Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).
• Packaging:– Wood crate, treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, which is confirmed by theaffixed IPPC logo.
or– Carton in accordance with European Packaging Directive 94/62EC; recyclability is
confirmed by the affixed RESY symbol.
• Seaworthy packaging (optional): Wood crate, treated in accordance with ISPM 15
standard, which is confirmed by the affixed IPPC logo.
• Carrying and mounting hardware:– Disposable plastic pallet– Plastic straps– Plastic adhesive strips• Dunnage: Paper cushion

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

6

Installation

6.1

Installation conditions

6.1.1

Mounting positionhMounting location

A0029343

Preferably install the sensor in an ascending pipe, and ensure a sufficient distance to thenext pipe elbow: h ≥ 2 × DN
To prevent measuring errors arising from accumulation of gas bubbles in the measuring
tube, avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe:• Highest point of a pipeline.
• Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.
Installation in down pipes
Install a siphon with a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes whose length h≥ 5 m (16.4 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk ofdamage to the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime.
For information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum

1

h

2

A0028981

412hInstallation in a down pipe
Vent valve
Pipe siphon
Length of down pipe

Installation in partially filled pipes
A partially filled pipe with a gradient necessitates a drain-type configuration. The empty
pipe detection (EPD) function offers additional protection by detecting empty or partiallyfilled pipes.

Endress+Hauser

21

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

N

³2

xD

N

³5

xD

A0029257

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
An optimum orientation position helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits inthe measuring tube.
The measuring device also offers the empty pipe detection function to detect partially filled
measuring pipes in the event of outgassing fluids or variable process pressures.
VerticalA0015591

Optimum for self-emptying pipe systems and for use in conjunction with empty pipe
detection.
Horizontal
1
2

2
3
A0029344

1
2
3

EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for potential equalization• Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the two measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
• Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards asotherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually
respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.
Inlet and outlet runs
If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces or elbows.
Observe the following inlet and outlet runs to comply with accuracy specifications:22

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation≥ 5 x DN

≥ 2 x DN

A0028997

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

6.1.2

Requirements from environment and process

Ambient temperature range
Transmitter

Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Local display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be
impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.

Sensor• Process connection material, carbon steel:–10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)• Process connection material, stainless steel:–40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Liner

Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .

If operating outdoors:• Install the measuring device in a shady location.
• Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions.
System pressure

A0028777

Never install the sensor on the pump suction side in order to avoid the risk of low pressure,and thus damage to the liner.
Furthermore, install pulse dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps
are used.
• For information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum• For information on the shock resistance of the measuring system• For information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system

Endress+Hauser

23

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Vibrations
In the event of very strong vibrations, the pipe and sensor must be supported and fixed.
• For information on the shock resistance of the measuring system• For information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system

L
A0029004

5

Measures to avoid device vibrations (L > 10 m (33 ft))

Thermal insulation
Pipes generally have to be insulated if they carry very hot fluids to avoid energy losses andprevent accidental contact with pipes at temperatures that could cause injury. Guidelines
regulating the insulation of pipes have to be taken into account.

LWARNING
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ The housing support dissipates heat and its entire surface area must remain uncovered.
Make sure that the sensor insulation does not extend past the top of the two sensor
half-shells.

max.

A0031216

Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor
in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring
accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to
calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.

24

1.

Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.

2.

From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

100 [mbar]
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s

10

3 m/s

max. 8°

2 m/s

d

D
1 m/s

1

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

d/D
A0029002

6.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Protective cover
280 (11.0)

255 (10.0)

134 (5.3)

12 (0.47)

30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)

146 (5.75)

A0029553

6.2

Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1

Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections:• Screws, nuts, seals etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be provided by
the customer.
• Appropriate mounting tools

6.2.2

Endress+Hauser

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

25

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.2.3

Mounting the sensor

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of theprocess connections and piping.
Ensurethat the gaskets are clean and undamaged.
‣
Installthegaskets correctly.
‣
1.

Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of
the medium.

2.

To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device
between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.

3.

If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided.

4.

Observe required screw tightening torques →  26.

5.

Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.
A0029263

Mounting the seals

LCAUTION
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube!
Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
‣ Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
1.

For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1.

2.

For "PFA" lining: generally additional seals are not required.

3.

For "PTFE" lining: generally additional seals are not required.

Mounting the ground cable/ground disks
Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions
for the use of ground cables/ground disks .
Screw tightening torques
Please note the following:• The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress.
• Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.

26

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

Screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), PN 40/25
Nominal diameter

Pressure ratingThreaded fasteners

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

15

PN 40

4 × M12

11

–

25

PN 40

4 × M12

26

20

32

PN 40

4 × M16

41

35

40

PN 40

4 × M16

52

47

50

PN 40

4 × M16

65

59

1)

PN 16

8 × M16

43

40

65

PN 40

8 × M16

43

40

80

PN 16

8 × M16

53

48

80

PN 40

8 × M16

53

48

100

PN 16

8 × M16

57

51

100

PN 40

8 × M20

78

70

125

PN 16

8 × M16

75

67

125

PN 40

8 × M24

111

99

150

PN 16

8 × M20

99

85

150

PN 40

8 × M24

136

120

200

PN 10

8 × M20

141

101

200

PN 16

12 × M20

94

67

200

PN 25

12 × M24

138

105

250

PN 10

12 × M20

110

–

250

PN 16

12 × M24

131

–

250

PN 25

12 × M27

200

–

300

PN 10

12 × M20

125

–

300

PN 16

12 × M24

179

–

300

PN 25

16 × M27

204

–

350

PN 10

16 × M20

188

–

350

PN 16

16 × M24

254

–

350

PN 25

16 × M30

380

–

400

PN 10

16 × M24

260

–

400

PN 16

16 × M27

330

–

400

PN 25

16 × M33

488

–

450

PN 10

20 × M24

235

–

450

PN 16

20 × M27

300

–

450

PN 25

20 × M33

385

–

500

PN 10

20 × M24

265

–

500

PN 16

20 × M30

448

–

500

PN 25

20 × M33

533

–

600

PN 10

20 × M27

345

–

1)

PN 16

20 × M33

658

–

600

PN 25

20 × M36

731

–

65

600

1)

Endress+Hauser

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)

27

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5, Class 150/300
Nominal diameter

Pressure ratingThreaded fasteners

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]([lbf · ft])

[mm]

[in]

[psi]

[in]

PTFE

PFA

15

½

Class 150

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

15

½

Class 300

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

25

1

Class 150

4×½

11 (8)

10 (7)

25

1

Class 300

4 × 5/8

14 (10)12 (9)

40

1½

Class 150

4×½

24 (18)21 (15)40

1½

Class 300

4×¾

34 (25)31 (23)50

2Class 150

4 × 5/8

47 (35)44 (32)50

2Class 300

8 × 5/8

23 (17)22 (16)80

3Class 150

4 × 5/8

79 (58)67 (49)80

3Class 300

8×¾

47 (35)42 (31)100

4Class 150

8 × 5/8

56 (41)50 (37)100

4Class 300

8×¾

67 (49)59 (44)150

6Class 150

8×¾

106 (78)

86 (63)150

6Class 300

12 × ¾

73 (54)67 (49)200

8Class 150

8×¾

143 (105)109 (80)250

10Class 150

12 × 7/8

135 (100)

– (–)

300

12

Class 150

12 × 7/8

178 (131)

– (–)

350

14

Class 150

12 × 1260 (192)

– (–)

400

16

Class 150

16 × 1246 (181)

– (–)

450

18

Class 150

16 × 1 1/8

371 (274)

– (–)

500

20

Class 150

20 × 1 1/8

341 (252)

– (–)

600

24

Class 150

20 × 1 ¼

477 (352)– (–)

Screw tightening torques for JIS B2220, 10/20K

28

Nominal diameter

Pressure ratingThreaded fasteners

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

25

10K

4 × M16

32

27

25

20K

4 × M16

32

27

32

10K

4 × M16

38

–

32

20K

4 × M16

38

–

40

10K

4 × M16

41

37

40

20K

4 × M16

41

37

50

10K

4 × M16

54

46

50

20K

8 × M16

27

23

65

10K

4 × M16

74

63

65

20K

8 × M16

37

31

80

10K

8 × M16

38

32

80

20K

8 × M20

57

46

100

10K

8 × M16

47

38

100

20K

8 × M2075

58

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Installation

Nominal diameter

Pressure ratingThreaded fasteners

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

125

10K

8 × M20

80

66

125

20K

8 × M22

121

103

150

10K

8 × M20

99

81

150

20K

12 × M22

108

72

200

10K

12 × M20

82

54

200

20K

12 × M22

121

88

250

10K

12 × M22

133

–

250

20K

12 × M24

212

–

300

10K

16 × M22

99

–

300

20K

16 × M24

183–

Screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E
Nominal diameter

Threaded fasteners

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

25

4 × M122150

4 × M16

42

Screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16
Nominal diameter

Threaded fasteners

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

50

4 × M16

42

6.2.4

Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

C

–

–

+

+

E

e

e

E

ar

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

4 mm

3.
A0029993

Endress+Hauser

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Release the fixing screw.

4.

Turn the housing to the desired position.
29

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

5.

Firmly tighten the securing screw.

6.

Screw on the connection compartment cover7.

Fit the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

6.2.5

Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

C

–

–

+

+

ES

C

E

–

E

ar

e

E

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

e

+

3.
A0030035

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in every direction.

4.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

5.

Fit the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

6.3

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document)• Ambient temperature• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium temperature• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

30



Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through thepiping ?



Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?

Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7

Electrical connection

Electrical connection

NOTICEThe measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so thatthe power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1

Connection conditions

7.1.1

Required tools• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2

Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.
Protective ground cable
Cable: 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.
Permitted temperature range
Minimum requirement: cable temperature range ≥ ambient temperature +20 K
Power supply cableStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Twisted, shielded two-wire cable.
For further information on planning and installing FOUNDATION Fieldbus networks
see:• Operating Instructions for "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview" (BA00013S)• FOUNDATION Fieldbus Guideline• IEC 61158-2 (MBP)
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Endress+Hauser

31

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Connecting cable for transmitter - remote display and operating module DKX001
Standard cable
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.
Standard cable4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield

Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R

Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Cable length for use in
non-hazardous area,
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cross-section

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG)

120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG)

180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG)

240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG)

300 m (1 000 ft)

Optionally available connecting cable

32Standard cable2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield≤200 pF/m

L/R≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length

10 m (35 ft)

Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7.1.3

Electrical connection

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

Input/output 1

2 (–)

26 (A)

Input/output 2

27 (B)

24 (+)

Input/output 3

25 (–)

22 (+)

23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module: →  37

7.1.4

Device plugs available

Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!
Order code for "Input; output 1", option SA "FOUNDATION Fieldbus"
Order code for"Electrical connection"

Cable entry
2

Cable entry3

M, 3, 4, 5

7/8" plug

–

7.1.5

Pin assignment of device plug
Pin

Assignment

2

3

1

+

Signal +

1

4

2

-

Signal –7.1.6

3

Grounding4

Not assigned

CodingPlug/socket

A

Plug

Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Remove dummy plug if present.

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  31.

33

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7.2

Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by correspondingly trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the devicespecific Ex documentation.

7.2.1

Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3

A0026781

1
2
3

Cable entry for supply voltage
Cable entry for signal transmission, input/output 1 and 2
Cable entry for input/output signal transmission; Optional: connection of external WLAN antenna,
connection of remote display and operating module DKX001 or service plug

3.
n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
ter

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES
C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

E

E
ES

C

+

ar

ar

4.

1.

3 mm

2.

e

e

–

E

3.
A0029813

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

4.

Remove the display module holder.

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

un
te r

6.

er
Powr ente fn nun g öf whe
enichtnnunNpat op
d vrir
S nozeDoergis ouionene patens
N us
so

I/O

Nicht

un
te r

Nicht

I/O

n
f ne
öf

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

e

e

I/O

ar

ar

ES

ES

C

–

C

–
+

+
E

E

5.
A0029814

34

5.

Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6.

Open the terminal cover.
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Electrical connection8.
7.

10 (0.4)

Nicht

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

e

mm (in)
ar

ES

C

–
+

9.

E

A0029815

7.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

8.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

9.

Connect the protective ground.

11.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

un
te r

22 mm

e

24 mm
ar
ES

C

–
+
E

10.
A0029816

10. Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  33.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.
12. Close the terminal cover.
13. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.
14. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
15. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

Endress+Hauser

35

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598636Engineering unit mm (in)1.

To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes2.

while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7.2.2

Electrical connection

Connecting remote display and operating module DKX001

Gnd

Vcc

NOTICE
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any onetime.
The remote display and operating module DKX001 cannot be connected at the same timeas the existing display and operating module.
‣ Existing display and operating module: Disconnect electrical connection.
‣ Connect the remote display and operating module DKX001.

A

B

81 82 83 84
1

2

Gnd

3

Vcc

81 82 83 84
A

B

A0027518

1
2
3

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Connecting cable
Measuring device

Remote display and operating module DKX001 →  164

7.3

Ensure potential equalization

7.3.1

Requirements

LCAUTION
Electrode damage can result in the complete failure of the device!
‣ Same electrical potential for the fluid and sensor‣ Company-internal grounding concepts‣ Pipe material and grounding

7.3.2

Connection example, standard scenario

Metal, grounded pipe

A00163157

Endress+Hauser

Potential equalization via measuring tube

37

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

7.3.3

Connection example in special situations

Unlined and ungrounded metal pipe
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable

DN ≤ 300

DN ≥ 350
A0029338

8

Potential equalization via ground terminal and pipe flanges

1.

Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them.

2.

If DN ≤ 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coatingof the sensor with the flange screws.

3.

If DN ≥ 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe screw tightening torques: see the Sensor Brief Operating Instructions.

4.

Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.

Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Ground cable

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

A0029339

9

Potential equalization via ground terminal and ground disks

1.

Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal via the ground cable.

2.

Connect the ground disks to ground potential.

Pipe with a cathodic protection unit
This connection method is only used if the following two conditions are met:
• Metal pipe without liner or pipe with electrically conductive liner• Cathodic protection is integrated in the personal protection equipment
38

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Electrical connection

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable+–

A0029340

Prerequisite: The sensor is installed in the pipe in a way that provides electrical insulation.
1.

Connect the two flanges of the pipe to one another via a ground cable.

2.

Guide the shield of the signal lines through a capacitor.

3.

Connect the measuring device to the power supply such that it is floating in relation
to the protective ground (isolation transformer).

7.4

Special connection instructions

7.4.1

Connection examples

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
1

2

3

4

5
6
6

6
5
6
6

6
8

7
A0028768

 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Power Conditioner (FOUNDATION Fieldbus)
Cable shield: the cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC requirements; observe cablespecifications
T-box
Measuring device
Local grounding
Bus terminator
Potential matching line

39

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

 11
1
2
3

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 12
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 13
1
2
3

40

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  169

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Electrical connection

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 14
1
2
3

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  169

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 15
1
2
3

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  170

Current input
1

2

3

A0028915

 16
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
External measuring device (for reading in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter: Observe input values

41Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 17
1
2
3

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values

7.5

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
A002927842

6.

Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.

7.6

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Do the cables used meet the requirements?

Do the cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  42 ?



If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?

Is the potential equalization established correctly ?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

8

Operation options

8.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5

6
A0029295

1
2
3
4
5
6

Endress+Hauser

Local operation via display module
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Communicator 475
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

43

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  194

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 18

44

Schematic structure of the operating menu

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.2.2

Operation options

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter
Languagetask-oriented

Operation
Setup

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuring the operational
display• Reading measured values• Defining the operating language• Defining the Web server operating language• Resetting and controlling totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of themeasurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of thecommunication interface

Wizards for fast commissioning:• Set the system units• Display I/O/configuration• Configure the inputs• Configure the outputs• Configuring the operational display• Define the output conditioning• Set the low flow cut off• Configure empty pipe detection• Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional)• Configure the WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

Endress+Hauser"Maintenance" role
Fault elimination:• Diagnostics and elimination ofprocess and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

45

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Menu/parameter
Expertfunction-oriented

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Tasks that require detailed
knowledge of the function of thedevice:• Commissioning measurements
under difficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult
conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern themeasurement or the communication interface.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Output
Configure the pulse/frequency/switch output.
• Input
Configuring the status input.
• Output
Configuring of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Submenus for function blocks (e.g. "Analog Inputs")
Configuration of function blocks.
• Application
Configure the functions that go beyond the actual measurement (e.g.
totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

8.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1

Operational display
1
2

XXXXXXXXX

4F

31120.50l/h

5A0029346

1
2
3
4
5

46

Operational display
Device tag→  77
Status area
Display area for measured values (4-line)
Operating elements→  51

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  125– F: Failure– C: Function check– S: Out of specification– M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  126– : Alarm– : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured values
SymbolMeaning
Volume flow
Conductivity
Mass flow
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Status input

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  126

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  93).

Endress+Hauser

47

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.3.2

2

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3/../Curr. output 1
S
Assign curr.
Volume flow

2

Operator
Locking status
Display

44

5

5A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

3

A0016327-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  51

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of thefollowing elements:• In the submenu:
Display symbol for menu
• In the wizard:
Display symbol for wizard↓
ExamplesOmission symbol for
operating menu levels in
betweenName of current• Submenu• Wizard• Parameters

↓

↓

/ ../

Display/ ../Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  49Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu– The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)– If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  125• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  54

48

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

Endress+Hauser

49

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.3.3

Editing view
Numeric editor

Text editor

1

1
2

20

2

0
5

1
6

2
7

3
8

4
9

User
ABC_
LMNO
XYZ

3

HIJK
TUVW
Aa1

3

4

4
A0013941

1
2
3
4

DEFG
PQRS

A0013999

Editing view
Display area of the entered values
Input mask
Operating elements →  51

Input mask
The following input symbols are available in the input mask of the numeric and text editor:
Numeric editor
SymbolMeaning0…
9.
–Selection of numbers from 0 to 9.

Inserts decimal separator at the input position.
Inserts minus sign at the input position.
Confirms selection.
Moves the input position one position to the left.
Exits the input without applying the changes.
Clears all entered characters.

Text editor
Symbol

Aa1

ABC _
…
XYZ

50

Meaning
Toggle• Between upper-case and lower-case letters• For entering numbers• For entering special characters
Selection of letters from A to Z.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

abc _
…
xyz

Selection of letters from a to z.

"'^ _
…
~& _

Selection of special characters.

Confirms selection.
Switches to the selection of the correction tools.
Exits the input without applying the changes.
Clears all entered characters.

Correction symbols under
SymbolMeaning
Clears all entered characters.
Moves the input position one position to the right.
Moves the input position one position to the left.
Deletes one character immediately to the left of the input position.

8.3.4
Key

Operating elements
Meaning
Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a choose list.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
In the input mask, moves the selection bar to the left (backwards).
Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a choose list.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Moves the selection bar to the right (forwards) in an input screen.

Endress+Hauser

51

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Key

MeaningEnter key
For operational display• Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
• Pressing the key for 2 s opens the context menu.
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:– Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
– Starts the wizard.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor• Pressing the key briefly:– Opens the selected group.
– Carries out the selected action.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms the edited parameter value.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:– Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Closes the text or numeric editor without applying changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)+

Reduces the contrast (brighter setting).
Plus/Enter key combination (press and hold down the keys simultaneously)+

Increases the contrast (darker setting).
Minus/Plus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)

+

8.3.5

+

For operational display
Enables or disables the keypad lock (only SD02 display module).

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation
Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX

20.50

Setup
Simulation

l/hA0017421-EN

52

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2.

Operation options

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

Endress+Hauser

1.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

53

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.3.6

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  48
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-10098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

8.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access
54

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

The direct access code consists of a 4-digit number and the channel number, which
identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 0914-1. In the navigation view, thisappears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
0914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Input of "914" instead of "0914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is jumped to automatically.
Example: Enter 0914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is jumped to: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 0914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 19

2.

Endress+Hauser

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

55

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.3.9

Changing the parameters

For a description of the editing display - consisting of text editor and numeric editor with symbols →  50, for a description of the operating elements →  51
Example: Changing the tag name in the "Tag description" parameter from 001-FT-101 to
001-FT-102
1496-1/../Advanced setup
Ent. access code
Tag description
001-FT-101
Def. access code1.

2.

001-FT-101

3x

ABC
LMNO
XYZ

3.

001-FT-10
ABC

4.

ABC
LMNO
XYZ

HIJK
TUVW
Aa1@

DEFG

HIJK

DEFG

HIJK

DEFG
PQRS

HIJK
TUVW
Aa1@

DEFG

HIJK

3456
/[]

789
()
Aa1@

3456

789

3456
/[]

789
()
Aa1@

ABC

001-FT-10

1x

ABC
LMNO
XYZ

6.

001-FT-10
ABC

2x

A

a

ABC
LMNO
XYZ

001-FT-102

4x

012
=+-*
0 1 2
<>{}

8.

001-FT-10
012

2x

0

1

9.

001-FT-102

1x

012
=+-*
0 1 2
<>{}

DEFG

HIJK

DEFG
PQRS

HIJK
TUVW
Aa1@

DEFG

HIJK

3456
/[]

789
()
Aa1@

3456

789

3456
/[]

789
()
Aa1@

001-FT-10
ABC
A

a

1 @

001-FT-10
012
=+-*
<>{}

1 @

7.

HIJK
TUVW
Aa1@

001-FT-10

1x

5.

DEFG
PQRS

001-FT-101
DEFG
PQRS

001-FT-10
ABC

001-FT-101

001-FT-10
012
0

1

2

001-FT-102

2

012
=+-*
0 1 2
<>{}

1496-1/../Advanced setup
Ent. access code
Tag description
001-FT-102
Def. access codeMax.

A0029563-EN

A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

56

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

8.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  110.
Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



–– 1)

1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted fromthe write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
sectionAccess authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

If an incorrect access code is entered, the user obtains the access rights of the "Operator" user role.

The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  110.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter (→  98) via the respective access
option.
1.

After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.

2.

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Local operation with touch control
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• Each time the device is restarted.
• If the device has not been operated for longer than one minute in the measured value
display.
1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu, select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, themessage Keylock on appears.

Switching off the keypad lock1.

The keypad lock is switched on.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu, select the Keylock off option.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4

Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1

Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation forthe device →  195

8.4.2

Prerequisites

Computer hardware
Hardware

58

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have an RJ45
interface.

The operating unit must have a
WLAN interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45
connector.

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:– iOS– Android Microsoft Windows XP is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
Web browser

The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
deselected .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: Ifenter
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Webbrowser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.
installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display, Whenclear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections

Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  123
Measuring device
DeviceInterface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 The measuring device has a WLAN
interface.
antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN
antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN
antenna

Web server

Web server must be enabled;
factory setting: ON

Web server and WLAN must be enabled;
factory setting: ON

information on enabling
information on enabling the
 For
 For
the Web server →  63
Web server →  63

Endress+Hauser

59

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.4.3

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device
1.

Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.

3.

The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and thecommunication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)1.

Switch on the measuring device.

2.

Connect to the computer using a cable →  65.

3.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

4.

Close any open Internet browsers.

5.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

60

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

Start the Web browser on the computer.

2.

Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  107)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  123

8.4.4

Endress+Hauser

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

61

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

8.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Operating language on the local display
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  128• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the measuring device

Menu

62

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
 For
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management• Data exchange between PC and measuring device:– Load the configuration from the measuring device(XML format, save configuration)– Save the configuration to the measuring device(XML format, restore configuration)– Export the event list (.csv file)– Export parameter settings(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)– Export the Heartbeat verification log(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system integration from the measuring
device: DD file
• Flashing a firmware version

Network
configuration

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in thenavigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection
• Off
• On

Factory setting
On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

On• The complete functionality of the web server is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

3.

If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  60.

63

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via FOUNDATION Fieldbus network
This communication interface is available in device versions with FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
1

1

2

3
4
5
6

7

8

9

6

7

8

9
A0028837

 20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

64

Options for remote operation via FOUNDATION Fieldbus network

Automation system
Computer with FOUNDATION Fieldbus network card
Industry network
High Speed Ethernet FF-HSE network
Segment coupler FF-HSE/FF-H1
FOUNDATION Fieldbus FF-H1 network
Power supply FF-H1 network
T-box
Measuring device

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)1
3

2

A0027563

 21
1
2
3

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, backlit, graphic display; touch control +
WLAN"
3

4

1

2

5

6

3

4

A0028839

1
2
3
4
5
6

Endress+Hauser

Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) foraccessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz) WLAN

Encryption

WPA2 PSK/TKIP AES-128

Configurable channels

1 to 11

Function

Access point with DHCP

65

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Range with integrated
antennaMax. 10 m (32 ft)

Range with externalantennaMax. 50 m (164 ft)

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2

Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370

Function scope
Field Xpert SFX350 and Field Xpert SFX370 are mobile computers for commissioning andmaintenance. They enable efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and
FOUNDATION fieldbus devices in the non-Ex area (SFX350, SFX370) and the Ex area
(SFX370).
For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S
Source for device description files
See data →  70

66

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

8.5.3

Operation options

FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it isalso a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  65
• WLAN interface→  65
Typical functions:• Configuring parameters of transmitters• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S
Source for device description files
See information →  70
Establishing a connection
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device nameTag name
Status area with status signal→  128
Display area for current measured values
Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Working area
Range of action
Status area

8.5.4

DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files
See information →  70

8.5.5

AMS Device Manager

Function scope
Program from Emerson Process Management for operating and configuring measuring
devices via FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 protocol.

68

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation options

Source for device description files
See data →  70

8.5.6

Field Communicator 475

Function scope
Industrial handheld terminal from Emerson Process Management for remoteconfiguration and measured value display via FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 protocol.
Source for device description files
See data →  70

Endress+Hauser

69

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

9

System integration

9.1

Overview of device description files

9.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.00.zz• On the title page of the Operating instructions• On the transmitter nameplate• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
versionRelease date of firmware version

02.2017---

Manufacturer ID

0x452B48 (hex) Manufacturer ID
Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID

Device type ID

0x103C (hex)

Device type
Diagnostics → Device information → Device type

Device revision1• On the transmitter nameplate• Device revision
Diagnostics → Device information → Device revision

DD revision

Information and files under:• www.endress.com• www.fieldbus.org

CFF revision

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  160

9.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via
FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Sources for obtaining device descriptions

FieldCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)• Field Xpert SFX350• Field Xpert SFX370

Use update function of handheld terminal

AMS Device Manager(Emerson Process Management)www.endress.com → Download Area

Field Communicator 475(Emerson Process Management)

Use update function of handheld terminal

9.2

Cyclic data transmission

Cyclic data transmission when using the device master file (GSD).

9.2.1

Block model

The block model shows which input and output data the measuring device makes available
for cyclic data exchange. Cyclic data exchange takes place with a FOUNDATION Fieldbus
master (Class 1), e.g. a control system etc.
70

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

System integration

Display text (xxxx... = serial number)Base index

Description

RESOURCE_ xxxxxxxxxxx

400

Resource block

SETUP_ xxxxxxxxxxx

600"Setup" Transducer block

TRDDISP_ xxxxxxxxxxx

800"Display" Transducer block

TRDHROM_ xxxxxxxxxxx

1000"HistoROM" Transducer block

TRDDIAG_ xxxxxxxxxxx

1200"Diagnostic" Transducer block

EXPERT_CONFIG_xxxxxxxxxxx

1400"Expert configuration" Transducer block

SERVICE_SENSOR_xxxxxxxxxxx

1600"Service sensor" Transducer block

TRDTIC_xxxxxxxxxxx

1800"Totalizer" Transducer block

TRDHBT_ xxxxxxxxxxx

2000

Transducer block “Heartbeat results“

ANALOG_INPUT_1_xxxxxxxxxxx

3400

Analog Input function block 1 (AI)ANALOG_INPUT_2_xxxxxxxxxxx

3600

Analog Input function block 2 (AI)ANALOG_INPUT_3_xxxxxxxxxxx

3800

Analog Input function block 3 (AI)ANALOG_INPUT_4_xxxxxxxxxxx

4000

Analog Input function block 4 (AI)ANALOG_INPUT_5_xxxxxxxxxxx

4200

Analog Input function block 5 (AI)MAO_ xxxxxxxxxxx

4400

Multiple Analog Output block (MAO)

DIGITAL_INPUT_1_ xxxxxxxxxxx

4600

Digital Input function block 1 (DI)

DIGITAL_INPUT_2_ xxxxxxxxxxx

4800

Digital Input function block 2 (DI)MDO_ xxxxxxxxxxx

5000

Multiple Digital Output block (MDO)

PID_ xxxxxxxxxxx

5200

PID function block (PID)

INTEGRATOR_xxxxxxxxxxx

5400

Integrator function block (INTG)

9.2.2

Assignment of the measured values in the function blocks

The input value of a module/function block is defined via the CHANNEL parameter.
AI module (Analog Input)
Five Analog Input blocks are available.
CHANNEL

Endress+Hauser

Measured variable

0

Uninitialized (factory setting)7

Temperature

9

Volume flow

11

Mass flow

12

Flow velocity

13

Corrected volume flow

16

Totalizer 1

17

Totalizer 2

18

Totalizer 3

65

Electronic temperature

70

Conductivity

71

Corrected conductivity

99

Current input 1

71

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

MAO module (Multiple Analog Output)
ChannelDescription

121

Channel_0

Structure
Channel_0
Value 1

1)

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

ValuesMeasured variable

Value 1

Temperature 1)

Value 2

Density 1)

Value 3

Not assigned

Value 4

Not assigned

Value 5

Not assigned

Value 6

Not assigned

Value 7

Not assigned

Value 8

Not assigned

Value 5

Value 6

Value 7

Value 8The external measured values must be transmitted to the device in the SI basic unit

The selection is made via: Expert → Sensor → External compensation
DI module (Discrete Input)
Two Discrete Input blocks are available.
CHANNEL72

Device function

State

0

Uninitialized (factory setting)–101

Switch output state

0 = off, 1 = active103

Low flow cut off

0 = off, 1 = active

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

CHANNEL

System integration

Device function

State

104

Empty pipe detection

105

1)

Verification status

0 = off, 1 = active
Overall result of the verification
Verification:• 16 = Failed• 32 = Passed• 64 = Not performed
Verification status
Verification:• 1 = Not performed• 2 = Failed• 4 = Being performed• 8 = Finished
Status; result• 17 = Status: not performed;
Result: failed• 18 = Status: failed;
Result: failed• 20 = Status: being performed;
Result: failed• 24 = Status: finished;
Result: failed• 33 = Status: not performed;
Result: passed• 34 = Status: failed;
Result: passed• 36 = Status: being performed;
Result: passed• 40 = Status: finished;
Result: passed• 65 = Status: not performed;
Result: not performed• 66 = Status: failed;
Result: not performed• 68 = Status: being performed;
Result: not performed• 72 = Status: finished;
Result: not performed

1)

Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package

MDO module (Multiple Discrete Output)
ChannelDescription

122

Channel_DO

Structure
Channel_DO
Value 1

Endress+Hauser

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

Value 6

Value 7

Value

Device function

State

Value 1

Reset totalizer 1

0 = off, 1 = execute

Value 2

Reset totalizer 2

0 = off, 1 = execute

Value 3

Reset totalizer 3

0 = off, 1 = execute

Value 4

Flow override

Value 5

Start heartbeat verification

Value 6

Status output

Value 80 = off, 1 = active
1)

0 = off, 1 = start
0 = off, 1 = active

73

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1)

Value

Device function

State

Value 7

Not assigned–

Value 8

Not assigned–

Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package

9.2.3

Execution times

Function block

Execution time (ms)Analog Input function block (AI)6

Digital Input function block (DI)4

PID function block (PID)

5

Multiple Analog Output block (MAO)

4

Multiple Digital Output block (MDO)

4

Integrator function block (INTG)

5

9.2.4

Methods

MethodBlockNavigation

Description

Set to "AUTO" mode

Resource Block

Via menu:
Expert → Communication → Resource block→ Target modeThis method sets the Resource Block and all theTransducer Blocks to the AUTO (Automatic)mode.

Set to "OOS" mode

Resource Block

Via menu:
Expert → Communication → Resource block→ Target modeThis method sets the Resource Block and all theTransducer Blocks to the OOS (Out of service)mode.

RestartResource Block

Via menu:
Expert → Communication → Resource block→ Restart

This method is used for selecting the setting forthe restart parameter in the Resource Block.
This resets device parameters to a specific value.
The following options are supported:• Uninitialized• Run• Resource• Defaults• Processor• To delivery settings

ENP parameter

Resource Block

Via menu:
Actions → Methods→ Calibrate → ENP
parameterThis method is used to display and configure theparameters of the electronic nameplate (ENP).

Overview diagnostics Remedy information

Diagnostic Transducer
Block

Via link:
Namur symbolThis method is used to display the diagnostic
event with the highest priority that is currently
active and the corresponding remedial
measures.

Actual diagnostics –Remedy information

Diagnostic Transducer
Block

Via menu:– Configure/Setup → Diagnostics → Actual
diagnostics– Device/Diagnostics → Diagnostics

This method is used to display remedial
measures for the diagnostic event with thehighest priority that is currently active.

Via menu:– Configure/Setup → Diagnostics → Previous
diagnostics– Device/Diagnostics → Diagnostics

This method is used to display remedial
measures for the previous diagnostic event.

Previous diagnostics –Remedy information

74

Diagnostic Transducer
BlockThis method is only available if an appropriate
diagnostic event has occurred.

method is only available if an Thisappropriate diagnostic event has occurred.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

10

Commissioning

10.1

Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist →  30
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  42

10.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer tothe section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  122.

10.3

Connecting via FieldCare• For FieldCare →  65 connection• For connecting via FieldCare →  67
• For the FieldCare →  68 user interface

10.4

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX
1.

XX
Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup

2.

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français3.

4.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français
Hauptmenü
Sprache0104-10104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 22

Endress+Hauser

Taking the example of the local display

75

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.5

Configuring the measuring device• The Setup menuwith its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu
Display language

1.

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 23

Taking the example of the local display

Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.
Navigation"Setup" menu Setup
Device tag→  77‣ System units→  77‣ Analog inputs→  80‣ I/O configuration→  80‣ Current input 1 to n

→  81‣ Status input 1 to n

→  82‣ Current output 1 to n

→  83‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  85‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  91

1 to n76

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.5.1

Commissioning‣ Display→  92‣ Low flow cut off→  94‣ Empty pipe detection→  96‣ Advanced setup→  97

Defining the tag nameTo enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter aunique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1

XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 24
1

Header of the operational display with tag nameTag nameEnter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  68
Navigation"Setup" menu → Device tag
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device tag

Description
Enter the name for the measuring point.

10.5.2User entry
32 characters such as letters,
numbers or special characters(e.g. @, %, /)Factory setting
Promag300/500

Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units

Endress+Hauser

Volume flow unit

→  78Volume unit

→  7877

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Conductivity unit

→  78Temperature unit

→  78Mass flow unit

→  78Mass unit→  78Density unit

→  78Corrected volume flow unit

→  79Corrected volume unit

→  79Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow unit

Prerequisite–

Description
Select volume flow unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• l/h• gal/min (us)ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Volume unit–

Select volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³• gal (us)Conductivity unit

The On option is selected in
the Conductivity
measurement parameterparameter.

Select conductivity unit.

Unit choose list

µS/cm

–

Select temperature unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/h• lb/minTemperature unit

EffectThe selected unit applies for:
Simulation process variable

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Temperature parameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter• External temperatureparameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter
Mass flow unit–

Select mass flow unit.
ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable

Mass unit–

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Density unit–

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/l• lb/ft³

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Simulation process variable

78

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter
Corrected volume flow unit

Commissioning

Prerequisite–

Description
Select corrected volume flow
unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl/h• Sft³/h

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³• Sft³ResultThe selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow
parameter (→  114)
Corrected volume unit

Endress+Hauser–

Select corrected volume unit.

79

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.5.3

Configuring the analog inputs

The Analog inputs submenu guides the user systematically to the individual Analog input
1 to n submenu. From here you get to the parameters of the individual analog input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Analog inputs‣ Analog inputs‣ Analog input 1 to n
Block tag

→  80Channel→  80

Process Value Filter Time→  80Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry / Selection

Factory setting

Block tag

Unique name of the measuring device.

Max. 32 characters such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

–ChannelSelect the process variable.

• Uninitialized• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronic temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current input 1 *Uninitialized

Process Value Filter TimeEnter the filter time specification for thefiltering of the unconverted input value(PV).

Positive floating-point number

0s*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.4

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers80→  81

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

I/O module 1 to n information→  81

I/O module 1 to n type→  81

Apply I/O configuration→  81

Conversion code→  81

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

I/O module terminal numbers

Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used
module.
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

I/O module information

Shows information of the plugged I/O
module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• Fieldbus–

I/O module typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *Off

Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely
configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

No

Conversion code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O
configuration.

Positive integer

0*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.5

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  82Signal mode→  820/4 mA value→  8220 mA value→  82Current span

→  8281

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Failure mode→  82

Failure value→  82

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active

Passive

0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number0

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterCurrent span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA
Country-specific:• 4...20 mA NAMUR • 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value

Alarm

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number0

10.5.6

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input‣ Status input 1 to n

82

Assign status input→  83

Terminal number→  83

Active level→  83

Terminal number→  83Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Response time status input→  83

Terminal number→  83

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by thestatus input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Off

Active level

Define input signal level at which theassigned function is triggered.

• High• Low

HighResponse time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the
5 to 200 ms
input signal level must be present before theselected function is triggered.

10.5.750 ms

Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  84Signal mode→  84

Assign current output 1→  84Current span

→  840/4 mA value→  8420 mA value→  84

Fixed current→  84

Failure mode→  84

Failure current→  8483

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign current output–

Select process variable forcurrent output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA• Fixed current

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Passive• Active

Passive

0/4 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  84):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)20 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  84):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Fixed current

In the Current span parameter Defines the fixed output(→  84), the Fixed current
current.
option is selected.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Failure mode

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperature

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Defined value

Max.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  84):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA
Failure current*

84

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.5.8Commissioning

Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  85

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency orswitch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Factory setting
Pulse

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  86

Terminal number→  86Signal mode→  86

Assign pulse output→  86

Value per pulse→  86

Pulse width→  86

Failure mode→  86Invert output signal→  8685

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

Passive

Assign pulse output 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Off

Value per pulse

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected and one of thefollowing options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  86):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Enter measured value at which Signed floating-pointa pulse is output.
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected and one of thefollowing options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  86):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

0.05 to 2 000 ms

100 msFailure mode

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected and one of thefollowing options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  86):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses

No pulses

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n86

Operating mode→  87

Terminal number→  87

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Signal mode→  87

Assign frequency output→  87

Minimum frequency value→  87

Maximum frequency value→  88

Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  88

Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  88

Failure mode→  88

Failure frequency→  88Invert output signal→  88Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

Passive

Assign frequency output

In the Operating modeparameter (→  85), theFrequency option is selected.

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature

Off

Minimum frequency value

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperatureEnter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

0.0 HzEndress+Hauser

87Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Maximum frequency value

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperatureEnter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

10 000.0 Hz

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperatureEnter measured value forminmum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperatureEnter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperature

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz

0 Hz

Failure frequency

One of the following options isselected in the Assign current
output parameter (→  84):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic temperatureEnter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzInvert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

88

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  89Terminal number→  89Signal mode→  89Switch output function→  90Assign diagnostic behavior→  90Assign limit→  90Assign flow direction check→  90Assign status→  90Switch-on value→  90Switch-off value→  90Switch-on delay→  90Switch-off delay→  91

Failure mode

→  91Invert output signal→  91

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

PassiveEndress+Hauser

89Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

In the Operating mode
Select function for switch
parameter the Switch option is output.
selected.

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status

Off

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign limit• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign flow direction check• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Flow direction check
option is selected in the
Switch output function
parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Empty pipe
detection• Low flow cut off• Digital output 6

Empty pipe detection

Switch-on value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-off value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.9Configuring the relay output

The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Switch output function→  92

Assign flow direction check→  92

Assign limit→  92

Assign diagnostic behavior→  92

Assign status→  92

Switch-off value→  92

Switch-on value→  92

Failure mode

→  9291

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Digital Output

ClosedTerminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)–

Assign flow direction check

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Flow direction
check option is selected.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign limit

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
detection
detection• Low flow cut off• Digital output 6

Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Switch-on value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.10 Configuring the local display
The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that canconfigured for configuring the local display.
92

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Display‣ Display
Format display→  93

Value 1 display→  930% bargraph value 1→  93

100% bargraph value 1→  93

Value 2 display→  93

Value 3 display→  940% bargraph value 3→  94

100% bargraph value 3→  94

Value 4 display→  94

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter

None

Endress+Hauser

93Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
None
the Value 1 display
parameter (→  93)

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
None
the Value 1 display
parameter (→  93)

10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable→  94

On value low flow cutoff→  94

Off value low flow cutoff→  95Pressure shock suppression→  95

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

One of the following options is Enter on value for low flow cut
selected in the Assign process off.
variable parameter (→  94):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow

94

Factory setting

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Commissioning

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Off value low flow cutoff

One of the following options is Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %selected in the Assign process off.
variable parameter (→  94):
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

50 %Pressure shock suppression

One of the following options is Enter time frame for signal
selected in the Assign process suppression (= active pressure
variable parameter (→  94): shock suppression).
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

0s

Endress+Hauser

0 to 100 s

95Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for theconfiguration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection‣ Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection→  96

New adjustment→  96

Progress→  96

Switch point empty pipe detection→  96

Response time empty pipe detection→  96

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Empty pipe detection–

Switch empty pipe detection on • Off
and off.
• On

Off

New adjustment

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Select type of adjustment.

• Cancel• Empty pipe adjust• Full pipe adjust

CancelProgress

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Shows the progress.

• Ok• Busy• Not ok–

Switch point empty pipe detection

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Enter hysteresis in %, below
this value the measuring tube
will detected as empty.

0 to 100 %10 %Response time empty pipe detection In the Empty pipe detection
parameter (→  96), the On
option is selected.

Enter the time before
diagnostic message S862 ' Pipeempty'' is displayed for empty
pipe detection.

0 to 100 s

1s

96Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.6

Commissioning

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

0104-1Main menu
Display language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/ ../Setup
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

4.

/ ../Advanced setup
Ent. access code5.

Device tag
Def. access code0092-1****
A0032223-EN

The number of submenus can vary depending on the device version. Some submenus
are not dealt with in the Operating Instructions. These submenus and the parameters
they contain are explained in the Special Documentation for the device.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup

Endress+HauserEnter access code→  98‣ Sensor adjustment→  98‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  98‣ Display→  100‣ Electrode cleaning circuit→  102

97

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus‣ WLAN settings→  103‣ Heartbeat setup

10.6.1‣ Configuration backup→  104‣ Administration→  106

Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Enter access code

Description

User entry

Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.

10.6.20 to 9 999

Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality ofthe sensor.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment‣ Sensor adjustment→  98Installation direction

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Installation direction

Description
Set sign of flow direction to match thedirection of the arrow on the sensor.

10.6.3

Selection

Factory setting• Flow in arrow direction
Flow in arrow direction• Flow against arrow direction

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

98

Assign process variable→  99Unit totalizer 1 to n

→  99Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Totalizer operation mode

→  99Failure mode

→  99Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection

Assign process variable–

Select process variable fortotalizer.

Unit totalizer 1 to n

One of the following options isselected in the Assign process
variable parameter (→  99)of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu:• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Select process variable totalizer Unit choose list
unit.

l

Totalizer operation mode–

Select totalizer calculationmode.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total

Net flow total

Failure mode–

Define totalizer behavior inalarm condition.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

Stop

Endress+Hauser• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Factory setting
Volume flow

99

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.6.4

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display

100

Format display→  101

Value 1 display→  101

0% bargraph value 1→  101

100% bargraph value 1→  101

Decimal places 1→  101

Value 2 display→  101

Decimal places 2→  101

Value 3 display→  101

0% bargraph value 3→  101

100% bargraph value 3→  101

Decimal places 3→  101

Value 4 display→  101

Decimal places 4→  101

Display language→  102

Display interval→  102

Display damping→  102

Header→  102

Header text

→  102

Separator→  102

Backlight→  102

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter

None

Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
None
the Value 1 display
parameter (→  93)

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
None
the Value 1 display
parameter (→  93)

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

Endress+Hauser

x.xx

101

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch *• Français *• Español *• Italiano *• Nederlands *• Portuguesa *• Polski *• русский язык(Russian) *• Svenska *• Türkçe *• 中文 (Chinese) *• 日本語(Japanese) *• 한국어 (Korean) *• ‫( الْعَرَبيّة‬Arabic) *• Bahasa Indonesia *• ภาษาไทย (Thai) *• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese) *• čeština (Czech) *English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s

5s

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

0.0 s

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text

Device tag

Header text

In the Header parameter, theFree text option is selected.

Enter display header text.

Max. 12 characterssuch as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,%, /)------------

Separator

A local display is provided.

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

• . (point)• , (comma). (point)

Backlight

One of the following
conditions is met:
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O "remote
4-line display, illum; 10m/
30ft cable; touch control"

Switch the local display
backlight on and off.

• Disable• Enable

Enable*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.5

Performing electrode cleaning

The Electrode cleaning circuit submenu contains parameters that must be configured forthe configuration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.

102

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning circuit‣ Electrode cleaning circuit
Electrode cleaning circuit→  103

ECC duration→  103

ECC recovery time→  103

ECC cleaning cycle→  103

ECC Polarity→  103

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Electrode cleaning circuit

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enable the cyclic electrodecleaning circuit.

ECC duration

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the duration of electrode 0.01 to 30 s
cleaning in seconds.

2s

ECC recovery time

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Define recovery time after
electrode cleaning. During thistime the current output values
will be held at last valid value.

1 to 600 s

60 s

ECC cleaning cycle

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the pause duration
between electrode cleaning
cycles.

0.5 to 168 h

0.5 h

ECC Polarity

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Select the polarity of theelectrode cleaning circuit.

• Positive• Negative

Depends on theelectrode material:• Platinum:
Negative option• Tantalum, Alloy
C22, stainlesssteel: Positive
option10.6.6• Off• On

Factory setting

Off

WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN Settings‣ WLAN settings
WLAN IP address

Endress+Hauser→  104103

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Security type→  104

WLAN passphrase→  104

Assign SSID name→  104

SSID name→  104

Apply changes→  104

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User entry /Selection

Factory setting

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the device
WLAN interface.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)

192.168.1.212

Security type–

Select the security type of the
WLAN interface.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSKWLAN passphrase

In the Security typeparameter, the WPA2-PSK
option is selected.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
charactersshould be changedSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

during commissioning
for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

User-defined

SSID nameIn the Assign SSID nameparameter, the User-defined
option is selected.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

EH_devicedesignation_last 7
digits of the serial
number (e.g.
EH_Promag_300_A
802000)–Use changed WLAN settings.

Apply changes

10.6.7

Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,
The user-defined SSID
letters and specialname may only be
assigned once. If the SSID charactersname is assigned morethan once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.
• Cancel• Ok

CancelConfiguration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup
Operating time104

→  105

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Last backup→  105

Configuration management→  105

Backup state→  105

Comparison result→  105

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved
to embedded HistoROM.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel
the embedded HistoROM.
• Execute backup• Restore• Compare• Clear backup data

CancelBackup stateShows the current status of data saving or
restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

None

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data withembedded HistoROM.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Check not done

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the integrated
HistoROM to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter
data of the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's integrated HistoROM. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the integrated HistoROM.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

Integrated HistoROM
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

Endress+Hauser

105

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

10.6.8Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration‣ Define access code→  106‣ Reset access code→  106

Device reset→  107

Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  106

Confirm access code→  106

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code106

Operating time→  107

Reset access code→  107

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

0x00



For a reset code, contact yourEndress+Hauser service organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset

Description
Reset the device configuration - either
entirely or in part - to a defined state.

10.7

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup• ENP restart

Factory setting
CancelSimulation

The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation

Endress+Hauser

Assign simulation process variable→  108

Process variable value→  108

Status input simulation→  108

Input signal level→  108

Current input 1 to n simulation→  108

Value current input 1 to n

→  108

Current output 1 to n simulation→  108107

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Value current output 1 to n

→  109Frequency output simulation 1 to n

→  109Frequency value 1 to n

→  109

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  109

Pulse value 1 to n

→  109

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  109

Switch status 1 to n

→  109

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  109

Switch status 1 to n

→  109

Device alarm simulation→  109

Diagnostic event category→  109

Diagnostic event simulation→  110

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable forthe simulation process that is
activated.

• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *Off

Process variable value–Enter the simulation value forthe selected process variable.

Depends on theprocess variableselected0

Status input simulation–

Switch simulation of the status • Off
input on and off.
• On

Input signal level

In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for theparameter, the On option issimulation of the status input.
selected.

• High• Low

HighCurrent input simulation–

Switch simulation of thecurrent input on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current input

In the Current input 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

0 mA

Current output simulation–

Switch the simulation of thecurrent output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

108

Off

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Commissioning

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Value current output

In the Current output 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

3.59 mA

Frequency output simulation

In the Operating modeparameter, the Frequency
option is selected.

Switch the simulation of thefrequency output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Frequency value

In the Frequency output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the On option is selected.

Enter the frequency value forthe simulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzPulse output simulation

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

For Fixed value option:
 Pulsewidth parameter(→  86) defines thepulse width of the pulses
output.

Pulse value

In the Pulse output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

0

Switch output simulation

In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch option
is selected.

Switch the simulation of theswitch output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status–

Select the status of the status
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Relay output simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status

The On option is selected in
the Switch output simulation
1 to n parameter parameter.

Select status of the relay
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Pulse output simulation–

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

0 to 65 535

0

Fixed value option:
 For
Pulse width parameter
defines the pulse widthof the pulses output.
Pulse value

In the Pulse output
simulation parameter, theDown-counting value option
is selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and • Off
off.
• On

Off

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event
category.

Process

Endress+Hauser• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• Process109

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Diagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event tosimulate this event.

Logging interval–

Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s
for data logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

*

• Off
• Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Factory setting

Off–

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  110• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  57
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  111• Protect access to parameters via block operation →  112

10.8.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  106).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  106) toconfirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressedfor 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protectedparameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  57.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display is
indicated by the →  57 Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation→ Access status

110

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Commissioning

Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  106).

2.

Max. Define a max. 4-digit numeric code as an access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  106) toconfirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  57.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser isindicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → AccessstatusResetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
1.

Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  107).

2.

Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  110.

10.8.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write accessto the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Endress+Hauser

111Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed→  113. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of theparameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A0029425

2.

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  113. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the headerof the operational display and in the navigation view.

10.8.3

Write protection via block operation

Locking via block operation:• Block: DISPLAY (TRDDISP); parameter: Define access code
• Block: EXPERT_CONFIG (TRDEXP); parameter: Enter access code

112

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

11

Operation

11.1

Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  57. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool).

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  75
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  186

11.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display →  92
• On the advanced settings for the local display →  100

11.4

Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

Endress+Hauser‣ Process variables→  114‣ Input values→  115‣ Output values→  117‣ Totalizer→  115113

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.4.1"Process variables" submenu

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables‣ Process variables
Volume flow

→  114Mass flow→  114

Corrected volume flow

→  114

Flow velocity→  114

Conductivity→  114

Corrected conductivity→  115

Temperature→  115

Density→  115

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow

Prerequisite–

Description
Displays the volume flow currently
measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  78).
Mass flow–

Displays the mass flow currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  78).
Corrected volume flow–

Displays the corrected volume flow
currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Correctedvolume flow unit parameter(→  79).
Flow velocity–

Displays the flow velocity currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberConductivity–

Displays the conductivity currently
measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity
unit parameter (→  78).

114

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Parameter
Corrected conductivity

TemperatureDensity

Operation

Prerequisite
One of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Description
Displays the conductivity currently
corrected.

User interface
Positive floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity
unit parameter (→  78).

One of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Displays the temperature currently
calculated.

Positive floating-point
number–

Displays the current fixed density or
Signed floating-point
density read in from an external device. number

Dependency
The unit is taken from theTemperature unit parameter(→  78).

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter.

11.4.2"Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer‣ Totalizer
Totalizer value 1 to n

→  115

Totalizer overflow 1 to n

→  115

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

Totalizer value 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  99) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Displays the current totalizer countervalue.

Signed floating-point
numberTotalizer overflow 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  99) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Displays the current totalizer overflow.

Integer with sign

11.4.3"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.

Endress+Hauser

115

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  116‣ Status input 1 to n

→  116

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n

→  116

Measured current 1 to n

→  116

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
→  116

Value status input

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

116

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

User interface• High• Low

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.4.4

Operation

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  117‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  117‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  118

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n
Output current 1 to n

→  117

Measured current 1 to n

→  117

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current 1

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.

Endress+Hauser

117

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency 1 to n

→  118

Pulse output 1 to n

→  118

Switch status 1 to n

→  118

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

Output frequency

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Pulse output

In the Operating mode parameter, thePulse option is selected.

Displays the pulse frequency currently
output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch status

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

Displays the current switch output
status.

• Open• Closed

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n
Switch status→  118

Switch cycles→  118

Max. switch cycles number→  118

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch status

Shows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

118

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

11.5

Operation

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  76)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  97)

11.6

Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:• Control Totalizer• Reset all totalizers
Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handlingControl Totalizer 1 to n

→  119

Preset value 1 to n

→  119

Reset all totalizers→  119

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry
• Totalize• Reset + hold
• Preset + hold
• Reset + totalize• Preset + totalize• HoldControl Totalizer 1 to n

One of the following options isselected in the Assign process
variable parameter(→  99)Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu:
Volume flow

Control totalizer value.

Preset value 1 to n

One of the following options isselected in the Assign process
variable parameter(→  99)Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu:
Volume flow

Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point
numberDependency–

Reset all totalizers to 0 andstart.

Reset all totalizers

11.6.1

Endress+Hauser

Factory setting
Totalize

0lunit of the selected The
process variable is
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
parameter (→  99).
• Cancel• Reset + totalize

CancelFunction scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize

The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.

119

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Options

Description

Preset + totalize

The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter andthe totaling process is restarted.

Hold

Totalizing is stopped.

11.6.2Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize

Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7

Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  67.
• Web browser
Function range• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Display of the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart

A0016222

 25

Chart of a measured value trend• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging

120

Assign channel 1...4→  121

Logging interval→  121

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operation

Clear logging data

→  121

Data logging→  121

Logging delay→  121

Data logging control→  121

Data logging status→  121

Entire logging duration→  121

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign channel 1 to n

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Current output 1• Electronic
temperature

Off

Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Define the logging interval fordata logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 999.0 s

1.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

CancelData logging–

Select the data logging
method.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Overwriting

Logging delay

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Enter the time delay formeasured value logging.

0 to 999 h

0h

Data logging control

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Start and stop measured value
logging.

• None• Delete + start• StopNone

Data logging status

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the measured value
logging status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Done

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the total logging
duration.

Positive floatingpoint number

0s*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

121

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

Solution

Local display dark and no output
signals

Supply voltage does not match thevalue indicated on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage→  34.

Local display dark and no output
signals

The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
wrong.

Local display dark and no output
signals

No contact between connecting
cables and terminals.

Check the connection of the cables
and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output
signals

Terminals are not plugged into the
I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into themain electronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output
signals

I/O electronics module is defective.
Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  162.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter bysimultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker bysimultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

The cable of the display module isnot plugged in correctly.

Insert the plug correctly into themain electronics module anddisplay module.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  162.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm"
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures

Text on local display appears in aforeign language and cannot be
understood.

Incorrect operating language isconfigured.

1. Press  +  for 2 s ("homeposition").
2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter(→  102).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between thedisplay module and the electronics
is interrupted.

• Check the cable and theconnector between the mainelectronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  162.

Possible causes

Solution

For output signals
Error
Signal output outside the valid
range

122

Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  162.

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error
display, but signal output isincorrect, though in the valid range.

Check and correct the parameter
configuration.

Device measures incorrectly.

1. Check and correct parameter
configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified inthe "Technical Data".

Configuration error or device isoperated outside the application.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

For access
Error

Possible causes

Solution

No write access to parameters

Hardware write protection enabled

Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  111.

No write access to parameters

Current user role has limited accessauthorization

1. Check user role →  57.
2. Enter correct customer-specificaccess code →  57.

No connection via FOUNDATION
Fieldbus

Device plug connected incorrectly

Check the pin assignment of theconnector .

Not connecting to Web server

Web server disabled

Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it ifnecessary →  63.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet
interface of the computer

1. Check the properties of theInternet protocol (TCP/IP) .
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

Incorrect WLAN access data

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device andoperating device .

WLAN communication disabled–

Not connecting to Web server,
FieldCare or DeviceCare

No WLAN network available• Check if WLAN reception ispresent: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection isenabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or
unstable

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device is outside ofreception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet
communication• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Data transfer active

Wait until data transfer or current
action is finished.

Connection lost

1. Check cable connection andpower supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser andrestart if necessary.

Not using optimum version of Web
server.

1. Use the correct Web browser
version .
2. Clear the Web browser cache andrestart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratioof the Web browser.

• JavaScript not enabled• JavaScript cannot be enabled

1. Enable JavaScript.
2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Not connecting to Web server

Web browser frozen and operation
no longer possible

Content of Web browser
incomplete or difficult to readNo or incomplete display ofcontents in the Web browser

Endress+Hauser

123Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Error

Possible causes

Solution

Firewall of computer or network ispreventing communication

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network isor DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
preventing communicationinterface (via port 8000 or TFTP
ports)

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Operation with FieldCare or
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
interface (port 8000)

12.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1

Transmitter

Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

1 2 3 4 5A0029629

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
Not usedCommunication
Service interface (CDI) active

LED
1

2

124

Supply voltage

Device status

Color

Meaning

Green

Supply voltage is ok

OffSupply voltage is off or too low

Red

Error

Flashing red

Warning3

Not used––4

Communication

White

Communication active

5

Service interface (CDI)

Yellow

Connection establishedFlashing yellow

Communication active

Off

No connection

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3

Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter• Via submenus →  155
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser

125Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

261

Electronics
modules

ExampleA0013962

A0013956

NAMUR
NE 1073-digit number

Operating elements
Key

MeaningPlus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

126

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.3.2

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Calling up remedial measuresS

XXXXXXXXX

20.50

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN

 26

Message about remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time of occurrence
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.

Endress+Hauser

127

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information→  126
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter• Via submenu →  155
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

12.5

Diagnostic information in DeviceCare or FieldCare

12.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
128

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

Function check (C)XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

C485 Simu...

P
P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

3

Out of spezification (S)Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal→  125
Diagnostic information→  126
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter• Via submenu →  155
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

261

Electronics
modules

ExampleA0013962

A0013956

NAMUR
NE 10712.5.23-digit number

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.

Endress+Hauser

129

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

The user is in the Diagnostics menu.
1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

12.6

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.6.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
0723-1/ ../Diagn. behavior
Diagnostic no. 044

WarningDiagnostic no. 274
Diagnostic no. 801
A0014048-EN

 27

Taking the example of the local display

You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:
Options

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The signal outputs and totalizers assume the definedalarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.

Warning

The device continues to measure. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A
diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Eventlogbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with theoperational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.

12.6.2

Adapting the status signal

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific status signal at the factory. The
user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic
event category submenu.
Expert → Communication → Diagnostic event category
Available status signals
Configuration as per FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification (FF912), in accordance with
NAMUR NE107.
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
A0013959

130

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

SymbolDiagnostics and troubleshooting

Meaning

A0013958

Out of specification
The device is being operated:• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

A0013957

Enabling the configuration of the diagnostic information according to FF912
For compatibility reasons, the configuration of the diagnostic information according to
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification FF912 is not enabled when the device is deliveredfrom the factory.
Enabling the configuration of the diagnostic information according to FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Specification FF912
1.

Open the Resource block.

2.

In Feature Selection parameter, select Multi-bit Alarm (Bit-Alarm) Support
option.
 The diagnostic information can be configured according to FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Specification FF912.

Grouping the diagnostic information
Diagnostic information is assigned to different groups. The groups differ depending on theweighting (severity) of the diagnostic event:• Highest weighting• High weighting• Low weighting
Assignment of the diagnostic information (factory setting)
The assignment of the diagnostic information ex-works is indicated in the following
tables.
The individual ranges of the diagnostic information can be assigned to another status
signal →  132.
Some diagnostic information can be assigned individually, irrespective of their range→  133.
Overview and description of all diagnostic information →  134

Endress+Hauser

WeightingStatus signal(factory setting)

Allocation

Diagnostic information range

HighestFailure (F)SensorF000 to 199

Electronics

F200 to 399

Configuration

F400 to 700

Process

F800 to 999

WeightingStatus signal(factory setting)

Allocation

Diagnostic information range

High

Function check (C)SensorC000 to 199

Electronics

C200 to 399

131Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

WeightingStatus signal(factory setting)

Allocation

Diagnostic information range

Configuration

C400 to 700

Process

C800 to 999

WeightingStatus signal(factory setting)

Allocation

Diagnostic information range

Low

Out of specification (S)Sensor

S000 to 199

Electronics

S200 to 399

Configuration

S400 to 700

Process

S800 to 999

WeightingStatus signal(factory setting)

Allocation

Diagnostic information range

Low

Maintenance required (M)SensorM000 to 199

Electronics

M200 to 399

Configuration

M400 to 700

Process

M800 to 999

Changing the assignment of the diagnostic information
The individual ranges of the diagnostic information can be assigned to another status
signal. This is done by changing the bit in the associated parameter. The bit change always
applies for the entire range of the diagnostic information.
Some diagnostic information can be assigned individually, irrespective of their range→  133
Each status signal has a parameter in the Resource Block in which it is possible to define
the diagnostic event for which the status signal is transmitted:• Failure (F): FD_FAIL_MAP parameter• Function check (C): FD_CHECK_MAP parameter• Out of specification (S): FD_OFFSPEC_MAP parameter• Maintenance required (M): FD_MAINT_MAP parameter
Structure and assignment of the parameters for the status signals (factory setting)
Weighting

Allocation

Bit

FD_
FAIL_
MAP

FD_
CHECK_MAP

FD_
OFFSPEC_
MAP

FD_
MAINT_
MAP

HighestSensor

31

1

0

0

0

Electronics

30

1

0

0

0

Configuration

29

1

0

0

0

Process

28

1

0

0

0

Sensor

27

0

1

0

0

Electronics

26

0

1

0

0

Configuration

25

0

1

0

0

Process

24

0

1

0

0

Sensor

23

0

0

1

0

Electronics

22

0

0

1

0

Configuration

21

0

0

1

0

High

Low

132

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

WeightingDiagnostics and troubleshooting

Allocation

Bit

FD_
FAIL_
MAP

FD_
CHECK_MAP

FD_
OFFSPEC_
MAP

FD_
MAINT_
MAP

Process

20

0

0

1

0

Sensor

19

0

0

0

1

Electronics

18

0

0

0

1

Configuration

17

0

0

0

1

Process

16

0

0

0

1

Configurable range →  133

15 to
1

0

0

0

0

Reserved (Fieldbus Foundation)

0

0

0

0

0

Low

Changing the status signal for a range of diagnostic information
Example: The status signal for the diagnostic information for electronics with the "Highest"
weighting is to be changed from failure (F) to function check (C).
1.

Set the Resource Block to the OOS block mode.

2.

Open the FD_FAIL_MAP parameter in the Resource Block.

3.

Change Bit 30 to 0 in the parameter.

4.

Open the FD_CHECK_MAP parameter in the Resource Block.

5.

Change Bit 26 to 1 in the parameter.
 If a diagnostic event occurs for electronics with the "Highest weighting", thediagnostic information to this effect is displayed with the function check (C)status signal.

6.

Set the Resource Block to the AUTO block mode.

NOTICENo status signal is assigned to an area of diagnostic information.
If a diagnostic event occurs in this area, no status signal is transmitted to the control
system.
‣ If you are changing the parameters, make sure that a status signal is assigned to allareas.
If FieldCare is used, the status signal is enabled and disabled using the check box ofthe particular parameter.
Assigning diagnostic information individually to a status signal
Some diagnostic information can be individually assigned to a status signal, irrespective of
their original range.
Assigning diagnostic information individually to a status signal via FieldCare.

Endress+Hauser

1.

In the FieldCare navigation window: Expert → Communication → Field diagnostics→ Alarm detection enable2.

Select the desired diagnostic information from one of the fields Configurable Area
Bits 1 to Configurable Area Bits 15.

3.

Press Enter to confirm.

4.

When selecting the desired status signal (e.g. Offspec Map), also select theConfigurable Area Bit 1 to Configurable Area Bit 15 that was assigned previously
to the diagnostic information (step 2).

5.

Press Enter to confirm.
 The diagnostic event of the selected diagnostic information is recorded.

133

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

6.

In the FieldCare navigation window: Expert → Communication → Field diagnostics→ Alarm broadcast enable

7.

Select the desired diagnostic information from one of the fields Configurable Area
Bits 1 to Configurable Area Bits 15.

8.

Press Enter to confirm.

9.

When selecting the desired status signal (e.g. Offspec Map), also select theConfigurable Area Bit 1 to Configurable Area Bit 15 that was assigned previously
to the diagnostic information (step 7).

10. Press Enter to confirm.
 The selected diagnostic information is transmitted over the bus when adiagnostic event to this effect occurs.
A change in the status signal does not affect diagnostic information that alreadyexists. The new status signal is only assigned if this error occurs again after the status
signal has changed.
Transmitting the diagnostic information over the bus
Prioritizing diagnostic information for transmission over the bus
Diagnostic information is only transmitted over the bus if its priority is between 2 and 15.
Priority 1-events are displayed but are not transmitted over the bus. Diagnostic
information with priority 0 (factory setting) is ignored.
It is possible to change the priority individually for the different status signals. The
following parameters of the Resource Block are used for this purpose:• FD_FAIL_PRI• FD_CHECK_PRI• FD_OFFSPEC_PRI• FD_MAINT_PRISuppressing certain diagnostic information
It is possible to suppress certain events during transmission over the bus using a mask.
While these events are displayed they are not transmitted over the bus. This mask is in
FieldCare Expert → Communication → Field diagnostics → Alarm broadcast enable. The
mask is a negative selection mask, i.e. if a field is selected the associated diagnostic
information is not transmitted over the bus.

12.7

Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the status signal and the
diagnostic behavior can be changed. Change the diagnostic information →  130

134

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.7.1

Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

043 Sensor short circuit
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check module connections
2. Contact service• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

082 Data storage
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Sensor failure

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

083 Memory content
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Sensor failure

1. Restart device
2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

135Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

170 Coil resistance

Check ambient and processtemperature

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Sensor failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

180 Temperature sensor defective

1. Check sensor connections
2. Replace sensor cable or sensor
3. Turn off temperature
measurement

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Sensor failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

181 Sensor connection

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Sensor failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

12.7.2

Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

201 Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

136

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

242 Software incompatible

1. Check software
2. Flash or change main electronics
moduleMeasured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check electronic modules
2. Change electronic modules• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

252 Modules incompatible
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

262 Sensor electronic connection faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

1. Check or replace connection
cable between sensor electronic
module (ISEM) and mainelectronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

270 Main electronic failure

Change main electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

137

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

271 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Change main electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

272 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

273 Main electronic failure

Change electronic

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

275 I/O module 1 to n defective

Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

138

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

283 Memory content

1. Reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

302 Device verification active
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Device verification active, please
wait.

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 2) C
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

311 Electronic failure

1. Do not reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) M
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

139

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Replace user interface board
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or mainelectronics• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

332 Writing in embedded HistoROM failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1. Transfer data or reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

140

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusiveelectronic modules

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

376 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 2) F
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

377 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Perform Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 2) F
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

141

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

382 Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

383 Memory content
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Contact service organization• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check ECC recovery time
2. Turn off ECC• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Short text

387 Embedded HistoROM failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Device failure

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

512 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

142

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.7.3

Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O
configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device
description and check wiring–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) M
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

330 Flash file invalid
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

Status signal [from the factory] 1) M
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

331 Firmware update failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

410 Data transfer

1. Check connection
2. Retry data transfer

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

143

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Download active, please wait

• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

412 Processing download
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

431 Trim 1 to n

Carry out trim–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

437 Configuration incompatible

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check data set file
2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new
configuration• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Short text

438 Dataset
Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) M
Diagnostic behavior
1)

144

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

441 Current output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current output settings

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 2)
1)2)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

442 Frequency output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 2)
1)2)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

443 Pulse output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check pulse output settings

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 2)
1)2)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

444 Current input 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current input settings

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 2)
1)2)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

453 Flow override

Deactivate flow override

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specificInfluenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

463 Analog input 1 to n selection invalid
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

1. Check module/channel
configuration
2. Check I/O module configuration

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

484 Failure mode simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Configuration error

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

146

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

485 Measured variable simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation frequency
outputMeasured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation pulse output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

494 Switch output simulation 1 to n

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

496 Status input simulation

Deactivate simulation status input–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)148

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

497 Simulation block output

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

511 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1. Check measuring period andintegration time
2. Check sensor properties

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Check I/O hardware
configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

530 Electrode cleaning is running

Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specificInfluenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

531 Empty pipe detection

Execute EPD adjustment

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

537 Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP address

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

594 Relay output simulation

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 1) C
Diagnostic behavior
1)150

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.7.4

Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

803 Current loop 1 to n

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Reduce ambient temperature• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Short text

832 Electronic temperature too highMeasured variable status [from the factory] 1)
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Increase ambient temperature• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Switch output status

Short text

833 Electronic temperature too low
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

151

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Reduce process temperature• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Short text

834 Process temperature too highMeasured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Increase process temperature• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Short text

835 Process temperature too low
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

842 Process limit

Low flow cut off active!
1. Check low flow cut off
configuration

Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Non specific–

Status signal [from the factory] 1) S
Diagnostic behavior
1)

152

Warning

Status signal can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

882 Input signal

1. Check input configuration
2. Check external device or process
conditions

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Non specificInfluenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 1) F
Diagnostic behavior
1)

Alarm

Status signal can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

937 EMC interference
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specificInfluenced measured
variables

1. Eliminate external magnetic field • Density
near sensor• Empty pipe detection
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

938 EMC interference
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specific

1. Check ambient conditions
regarding EMC influence
2. Turn off diagnostic message

Influenced measured
variables• Density• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 2) F
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Alarm

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

962 Empty pipe
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1. Perform full pipe adjustment
2. Perform empty pipe adjustment
3. Turn off empty pipe detection

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Non specificInfluenced measured
variables
Low flow cut off

Status signal [from the factory] 2) S
Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 3)
1)
2)
3)

Warning

Quality can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.
Status signal can be changed.
Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

12.8

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  127• Via Web browser →  128• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  129• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  129
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  155
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

154

Actual diagnostics→  155

Previous diagnostics→  155

Operating time from restart→  155

Operating time→  155

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

12.9

Diagnostic messages in the DIAGNOSTIC Transducer
Block• The Actual diagnostics parameter (actual diagnostics) displays the message with thehighest priority.
• A list of the active alarms can be viewed via the Diagnostics 1 parameter(diagnostics_1) to Diagnostics 5 (diagnostics 5). If more than 5 messages are pending,the messages with the highest priority are shown on the display.
• You can view the last alarm that is no longer active via the Previous diagnostics
parameter (previous_diagnostics).

12.10 Diagnostic list
Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 28

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  127• Via Web browser →  128• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  129• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  129

Endress+Hauser

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.11 Event logbook
12.11.1 Event history
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list
/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 29

Taking the example of the local display• Max. 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  134• Information events →  157
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event– : Occurrence of the event– : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  127• Via Web browser →  128• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  129• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  129
For filtering the displayed event messages →  156

12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)156

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.11.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

Endress+Hauser

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

I1092

Embedded HistoROM deleted

I1137

Electronic changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronic temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1184

Display connected

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1278

I/O module reset detected

I1335

Firmware changed

I1351

Empty pipe detection adjustment failure

I1353

Empty pipe detection adjustment ok

I1361

Web server login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1443

Coating thickness not determined

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1457

Measured error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finishedI1618

I/O module replaced

I1619

I/O module replaced

I1621

I/O module replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

Reset all totalizers

I1625

Write protection activated

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server login successful

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Info number

Info name

I1628

Display login successful

I1629

CDI login successful

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display login failed

I1633

CDI login failed

I1634

Parameter factory reset

I1635

Parameter delivery reset

I1637

FOUNDATION Fieldbus specific reset done

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

12.12 Resetting the measuring device
Using theRestart parameter it is possible to reset the entire device configuration or someof the configuration to a defined state.

12.12.1 Function scope of the "Restart" parameter
Options

Description

Uninitialized

The selection has no effect on the device.

Run

The selection has no effect on the device.

Resource

The selection has no effect on the device.

Defaults

All FOUNDATION Fieldbus blocks are reset to their factory settings.
Example: Analog Input Channel to the Uninitialized option.

Processor

The device is restarted.

To delivery settings

Advanced FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters (FOUNDATION Fieldbus blocks,
schedule information) and device parameters for which a customer-specific default
setting was ordered are reset to this customer-specific value.

12.13 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information

158

Device tag→  159

Serial number→  159

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Device name→  159

Firmware version→  159

Order code→  159

Extended order code 1→  159

Extended order code 2→  159

ENP version→  159

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry / User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Enter the name for the measuring point.

32 characters such as letters,
numbers or special characters(e.g. @, %, /)Promag300/500

Serial number

Displays the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Promag300/500–The name can be found on the
nameplate of the transmitter.

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string with thefollowing format:
xx.yy.zz–

Order code

Shows the device order code.

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks–

Character string–

Character string–

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Extended order code 1

The order code can be found on the
nameplate of the sensor andtransmitter in the "Order code" field.

Shows the 1st part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

Endress+Hauser

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

12.14 Firmware history
Releasedate

Firmwareversion02.2017 01.00.zz

Order codefor"Firmwareversion"Firmware
Modifications

Option 72

Original firmware

Documentation
type

OperatingInstructions

Documentation

BA01478D/06/EN/01.16

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:– Product root: e.g. 5H3B
– Text search: Manufacturer's information– Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

160

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

13

Maintenance

13.1

Maintenance tasks

MaintenanceNo special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2

Interior cleaning

No interior cleaning is planned for the device.

13.1.3Replacing seals

The sensor's seals (particularly aseptic molded seals) must be replaced periodically.
The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, thecleaning temperature and the medium temperature.
Replacement seals (accessory) →  193

13.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  164

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

Endress+Hauser

161

Repairs

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

14

Repairs

14.1

General notes

14.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2

Spare parts

W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here andcan be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter in the Device information
submenu.

14.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4

ReturnThe measuring device must be returned if it is need of repair or a factory calibration, or if
the wrong measuring device has been delivered or ordered. Legal specifications require
Endress+Hauser, as an ISO-certified company, to follow certain procedures when handling
products that are in contact with the medium.
To ensure safe, swift and professional device returns, please refer to the procedure andconditions for returning devices provided on the Endress+Hauser website at
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

162

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

14.5

Disposal

14.5.1

Removing the measuring device

1.

Repairs

Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive fluids.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

Endress+Hauser

163

Accessories

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

15

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Transmitter Promag 300

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display / operation• Housing• Software Order number: 5X3BXX For details, see Installation Instructions EA01150
Remote display andoperating module
DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Separate backlit, 4-line display;
10 m (30 ft) Cable; touch control"
The remote display and operating module DKX001 can also be ordered separately
and subsequently as an accessory without a measuring device .
mounting bracket can be ordered directly with the DKX001 (order code
 The
DKX001: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting bracket,
1"/2" pipe").
It is also available as a separate accessory. Order number: 71340960

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  187.
 For details, see Special Documentation SD01763D
WLAN antenna
Wide range
Protective cover

External WLAN antenna for a range of up to 50 m (165 ft).

 Further information on the WLAN interface →  65.
Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505
 For details, see Installation Instructions EA01160
Ground cable

15.1.2Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.

For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Ground disks

Are used to ground the fluid in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper
measurement.

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D

164

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

15.2

Accessories

Communication-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Field Xpert SFX350

Field Xpert SFX350 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus devices in the non-Ex area.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S
Field Xpert SFX370

Field Xpert SFX370 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus devices in the non-Ex area and the Ex area.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S
15.3

Service-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter: e.g.
nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of a
project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://wapps.endress.com/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a plantand its components is generated from the first stages of planning and during theasset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform with
online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth data
shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes andincreases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage them. By
using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking theirstatus and condition.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.

 For details, see Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
display recorder

The Memograph M graphic display recorder provides information on all relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
For details, see "Technical Information" TI00133R and Operating Instructions
 BA00247R

Endress+Hauser

165

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

16

Technical data

16.1

Application

Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.

Measuring system

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  14

16.3
Measured variable

Input

Direct measured variables• Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage)• Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Measuring range

Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Flow characteristic values in SI units
Nominaldiameter

166

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Current output full scalevalue 1)(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value 1) Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]15½

4 to 100

25

0.2

0.5

25

1

9 to 300

75

0.5

1

32

–

15 to 500

125

1

2

40

1½

25 to 700

200

1.5

3

50

2

35 to 1 100

300

2.5

5

65

–

60 to 2 000

500

5

8

80

3

90 to 3 000

750

5

12

100

4

145 to 4 700

1200

10

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

NominaldiameterTechnical data

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Current output full scalevalue 1)(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value 1) Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]125–

220 to 7 500

1850

15

30

150

6

20 to 600 m3/h

150 m3/h0.03 m3

2.5 m3/h200

835 to 1 100 m3/h

300 m3/h

0.05 m3

5 m3/h250

1055 to 1 700 m3/h

500 m3/h

0.05 m3

7.5 m3/h300

1280 to 2 400 m3/h

750 m3/h

0.1 m3

10 m3/h

350

14

110 to 3 300 m3/h

1 000 m3/h

0.1 m3

15 m3/h

400

16

140 to 4 200 m3/h

1 200 m3/h

0.15 m3

20 m3/h450

18

180 to 5 400 m3/h

1 500 m3/h

0.25 m3

25 m3/h

500

20

220 to 6 600 m3/h

2 000 m3/h

0.25 m3

30 m3/h

600

24

310 to 9 600 m3/h

2 500 m3/h

0.3 m3

40 m3/h1)

HART only

Flow characteristic values in US units
Nominaldiameter1)

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Current output full scalevalue 1)(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value 1) Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]½

15

1.0 to 27

6

0.1

0.15

1

25

2.5 to 80

18

0.2

0.25

1½

40

7 to 190

50

0.5

0.75

2

50

10 to 300

75

0.5

1.25

3

80

24 to 800

200

2

2.5

4

100

40 to 1 250

300

2

4

6

150

90 to 2 650

600

5

12

8

200

155 to 4 850

1200

10

15

10

250

250 to 7 500

1500

15

30

12

300

350 to 10 600

2400

25

45

14

350

500 to 15 000

3600

30

60

16

400

600 to 19 000

4800

50

60

18

450

800 to 24 000

6000

50

90

20

500

1 000 to 30 000

7500

75

120

24

600

1 400 to 44 000

10500

100

180

HART only

Recommended measuring range"Flow limit" section →  181

Endress+Hauser

167

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operable flow range

Over 1000 : 1

Input signal

External measured values
To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the corrected volume
flow, the automation system can continuously write different measured values to themeasuring device:• Fluid temperature to increase the accuracy of the electrical conductivity (e.g. iTEMP)• Reference density for calculating the corrected volume flow
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be orderedfrom Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  165
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the following measured
variables:
Corrected volume flow
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  168.
Digital communication
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Pressure• Temperature• Density

Status input

168

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Adjustable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

16.4
Output Signal

Technical data

Output

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
FOUNDATION Fieldbus

H1, IEC 61158-2, galvanically isolated

Data transfer

31.25 KBit/s

Current consumption

10 mA

Permitted supply voltage

9 to 32 V

Bus connection

With integrated reverse polarity protection

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Current output

0/4 to 20 mA

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Adjustable: 0.07 to 999 s

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronic temperature

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output

Endress+Hauser

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Adjustable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Adjustable

169Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Adjustable: 0 to 999 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronic temperature

Switch output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Adjustable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:– Off– Volume flow
– Mass flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Flow velocity– Conductivity– Corrected conductivity– Totalizer 1-3– Temperature– Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status– Empty pipe detection– Low flow cut off

Relay output

170

Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:– Off– Volume flow
– Mass flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Flow velocity– Conductivity– Corrected conductivity– Totalizer 1-3– Temperature– Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status– Empty pipe detection– Low flow cut off

User configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
The technical values correspond to those of the inputs and outputs described in thissection.
Signal on alarm

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Status and alarm
messages

Diagnostics in accordance with FF-891

Error current FDE (Fault
Disconnection Electronic)

0 mA

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure modeEndress+Hauser

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

171

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus• Via service interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web server
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

172

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data

Manufacturer ID

0x452B48 (hex)

Ident number

0x103C (hex)

Device revision

1

DD revision

Information and files under:• www.endress.com• www.fieldbus.org

CFF revisionInteroperability Test Kit (ITK) Version 6.2.0
ITK Test Campaign Number

Information:• www.endress.com• www.fieldbus.org

Link Master capability (LAS)

Yes

Choice of "Link Master" and"Basic Device"

Yes
Factory setting: Basic Device

Node address

Factory setting: 247 (0xF7)

Supported functions

The following methods are supported:• Restart• ENP Restart• Diagnostic• Set to OOS• Set to AUTO
• Read trend data
• Read event logbook

Virtual Communication Relationships (VCRs)
Number of VCRs

44

Number of link objects in VFD 50
Permanent entries

1

Client VCRs

0

Server VCRs

10

Source VCRs

43

Sink VCRs

0

Subscriber VCRs

43

Publisher VCRs

43

Device Link Capabilities
Slot time4

Min. delay between PDU

8Max. response delay

16

Transducer Blocks
Block

Endress+Hauser

Contents

Output values

Setup Transducer Block All parameters for standard commissioning.
(TRDSUP)No output values

Display Transducer
Block(TRDDISP)No output values

Parameters for configuring the local display.

173

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Block

Contents

Output values

HistoROM Transducer
Block(TRDHROM)

Parameters for using the HistoROM function.

No output values

Diagnostic Transducer
Block(TRDDIAG)

Diagnostics information.

Process variables (AI Channel)• Temperature (7)• Volume flow (9)• Mass flow (11)• Corrected volume flow (13)• Flow velocity (37)
• Electronic temperature (39)
• Conductivity (70)• Corrected conductivity (71)

Expert Configuration
Transducer Block(TRDEXP)Parameters that require the user to have indepth knowledge of the operation of the device
in order to configure the parameters
appropriately.

No output values

Service Sensor
Transducer Block(TRDSRVS)

Parameters that can only be accessed by Endress No output values+Hauser Service.

Total Inventory
Counter Transducer
Block(TRDTIC)

Parameters for configuring all the totalizers andthe inventory counter.

Process variables (AI Channel)• Totalizer 1 (16)• Totalizer 2 (17)• Totalizer 3 (18)Heartbeat Technology
Transducer Block(TRDHBT)Parameters for the configuration andcomprehensive information about the results ofthe verification.

No output values

Function blocks
Block

174

NumberblocksExecution times

Process variables (Channel)

Resource Block(RB)

1This Block (extended functionality) contains–
all the data that uniquely identify the device; itis the equivalent of an electronic nameplate
for the device.

Analog Input
Block
(AI)

5

6 ms

Process variables (AI Channel)• Temperature (7)• Volume flow (9)• Mass flow (11)• Corrected volume flow (13)• Totalizer 1 (16)• Totalizer 2 (17)• Totalizer 3 (18)
• Flow velocity (37)
• Electronic temperature (39)
• Conductivity (70)• Corrected conductivity (71)Discrete Input
Block
(DI)

2

4 ms

• Switch output state (101)• Low flow cut off (103)• Empty pipe detection (104)• Status verification (105)PID Block
(PID)

1

5 ms

–

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Block

Technical data

NumberblocksMultiple Analog
Output Block
(MAO)

1

Execution times

Process variables (Channel)

4 ms

Channel_0 (121)• Value 1: External
compensation variable,temperature• Value 2: External
compensation variable,
densitycompensation
 Thevariables must betransmitted to the device
in the SI basic units.

Multiple Digital
Output Block
(MDO)

1

Integrator Block
(IT)

1

16.5

4 ms

Channel_DO (122)• Value 1: Reset totalizer 1• Value 2: Reset totalizer 2• Value 3: Reset totalizer 3• Value 4: Flow override• Value 5: Start heartbeat
verification• Value 6: Status switch output• Value 7: Not assigned• Value 8: Not assigned

5 ms

–

Power supply

Terminal assignment→  33

Device plugs available→  33

Pin assignment, device plug→  33

Supply voltage

Order code for"Power supply"

terminal voltage

Option D

DC 24 V

±20%–

Option E

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

DC 24 V

±20%–

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)

Current consumption

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Endress+Hauser

175

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Power supply failure• Totalizers stop at the last value measured.
• Configuration is retained in the plug-in memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Electrical connection→  34

Potential equalization→  37

terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:– NPT ½"
– G ½"– M20• Device plug for digital communication: M12

Cable specification→  31

16.6

Performance characteristics

Reference operating
conditions• Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456• Water, typically +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi)
• Data as indicated in the calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025

Maximum measured error

Error limits under reference operating conditions
o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
• ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)• Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.

[%]
2.5
2.0

0.5 %

1.5

0.2 %

1.0
0.5
0
0

0

1

2

5

4

10

6

15

20

8

25

30

10 [m/s]v
32 [ft/s]
A0028974

 30

176

Maximum measured error in % o.r.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Electrical conductivity
Max. measured error not specified.
Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.
Current output
Accuracy±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading
Accuracy

Repeatability

Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (across the entire ambient temperature range)o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)
Electrical conductivity
Max. ±5 % o.r.

Influence of ambient
temperature

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

16.7

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Installation"Mounting requirements"

16.8
Ambient temperature
range

Environment→  23Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature

Endress+Hauser–50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F)

177

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus• Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
• If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.
Degree of protection• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration resistance• Vibration, sinusoidal according to IEC 60068-2-6– 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
– 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
• Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64– 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz– 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz– Total: 1.54 g rms

Shock resistance

Shock, half-sine according to IEC 60068-2-27
6 ms 30 g

Impact resistance

Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31

Mechanical load

• Protect the transmitter housing against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact.
• Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)

As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)
For details, refer to the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9
Medium temperature range

178

Process• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE, DN 15 to 600 (½ to 24")

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

2

3

4

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0035803

 31
TA
TF
1
2
3
4

PFA

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range –10 to –20 °C (+14 to –4 °F) applies to stainless flanges only
Hatched area: harsh environment only for fluid temperature range –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F)–20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")–20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0029808

 32
TA
TF
1

Conductivity

Endress+Hauser

PTFE

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range of –10 to –40 °C (+14 to –40 °F) applies to stainless flanges
only≥ 5 μS/cm for liquids in general. Stronger filter damping is required for very low
conductivity values.

179

Technical data

Pressure-temperature
ratings
Pressure tightness

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections isprovided in the "Technical Information" document"–" = no specifications possible
Liner: PFA
Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 to +180 °C(+212 to +356 °F)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

65

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

80

3

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100

4

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

125

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

150

6

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

200

8

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

Liner: PTFE

180

Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 °C (+212 °F)+130 °C (+266 °F)

15

½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

65

–

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

80

3

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

100

4

0 (0)

–

135 (1.96)

170 (2.47)

125–

135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)150

6135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)200

8200 (2.90)–

290 (4.21)

410 (5.95)

250

10

330 (4.79)–

400 (5.80)

530 (7.69)

300

12

400 (5.80)–

500 (7.25)

630 (9.14)

350

14

470 (6.82)–

600 (8.70)

730 (10.6)

400

16

540 (7.83)–

670 (9.72)

800 (11.6)

450

18

500

20

600

24

No negative pressure permitted!

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Flow limit

Technical data

The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match thevelocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the fluid:• v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive fluids (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry)• v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor
nominal diameter.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section →  166

Pressure loss

• No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal
diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545→  24[psi] [mbar]
7 500
6

DN50
(2")

450
400

5

350

4

300

DN65
(2½")
DN80
(3")

250
3
2
1
0

200
150
100
50
0

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 [m³/h]

0

10

20

0

50

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500[gal/min]
A0032667-EN

 33

Endress+Hauser

Pressure loss DN 50 to 80 (2 to 3") in the case of order code for "Design", option C "Insertion length short
ISO/DVGW to DN300, without inlet/outlet runs, constricted meas.tube"

181

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus[psi][mbar]
13 900
12
800
11
DN125
10 700
(5")
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

DN150
(6")

DN250
(10")

DN200
(8")

600 DN100
(4")
500

DN300
(12")

400
300
200
100
0

400

600

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 [m³/h]

0

200

0

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 [gal/min]
A0032668-EN

 34

Pressure loss DN 100 to 300 (4 to 12") in the case of order code for "Design", option C "Insertion length
short ISO/DVGW to DN300, without inlet/outlet runs, constricted meas.tube"

System pressure
Vibrations

16.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

Weight

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.
• Weight specifications apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging
material.
• Weight data including transmitter• Transmitter version for the hazardous area: +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
Nominal diameter

182

EN (DIN), AS 1)

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

15

½

PN 40

7.2

Class 150

7.2

10K

4.5

25

1

PN 40

8.0

Class 150

8.0

10K

5.3

32

–

PN 40

8.7

Class 150

–

10K

5.3

40

1½

PN 40

10.1

Class 150

10.1

10K

6.3

50

2

PN 40

11.3

Class 150

11.3

10K

7.3

65

–

PN 16

12.7

Class 150

–

10K

9.1

80

3

PN 16

14.7

Class 150

14.7

10K

10.5

100

4

PN 16

16.7

Class 150

16.7

10K

12.7

125

–

PN 16

22.2

Class 150

–

10K

19

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

EN (DIN), AS 1)

Nominal diameter

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

150

6

PN 16

26.2

Class 150

26.2

10K

22.5

200

8

PN 10

45.7

Class 150

45.7

10K

39.9

250

10

PN 10

65.7

Class 150

75.7

10K

67.4

300

12

PN 10

70.7

Class 150

111

10K

70.3

350

14

PN 10

105.7

Class 150

176

400

16

PN 10

120.7

Class 150

206

450

18

PN 10

161.7

Class 150

256

500

20

PN 10

156.7

Class 150

286

600

24

PN 10

208.7

Class 150

406

1)

For flanges to AS, only DN 25 and 50 are available.

Weight in US units
Nominal diameter

Measuring tube
specification

Endress+Hauser

ASME

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating

[lbs]

15

½

Class 150

15.9

25

1

Class 150

17.6

40

1½

Class 150

22.3

50

2

Class 150

24.9

80

3

Class 150

32.4

100

4

Class 150

36.8

150

6

Class 150

57.7

200

8

Class 150

101

250

10

Class 150

167

300

12

Class 150

244

350

14

Class 150

387

400

16

Class 150

454

450

18

Class 150

564

500

20

Class 150

630

600

24

Class 150

895

NominaldiameterPressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

15

½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

–

–

15

0.59

25

1

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

–

20K

23

0.91

26

1.02

32

–

PN 40

–

–

–

20K

32

1.26

35

1.38

40

1½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

36

1.42

41

1.61

50

2

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

PN 16

10K

48

1.89

52

2.05

65

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

63

2.48

67

2.64

183

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

NominaldiameterMaterials

Pressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

80

3

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

75

2.95

80

3.15

100

4

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

101

3.98

104

4.09

125

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

126

4.96

129

5.08

150

6

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

154

6.06

156

6.14

200

8

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

201

7.91

202

7.95

Transmitter housing
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands

1

2
3
4
A0028352

 35
1
2
3
4

Possible cable entries/cable glands

Cable entry with M20 × 1.5 internal thread
Cable gland M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" or NPT ½"
Device plug coupling

Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable glandMaterial

Cable gland M20 × 1.5

Plastic/nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½"

Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"
Device plug coupling

184

Plug M12 × 1• Socket: Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)• Contact housing: Polyamide• Contacts: Gold-plated brass

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Device plug
Electrical connection

Material

Plug M12x1• Socket: Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)• Contact housing: Polyamide• Contacts: Gold-plated brass

Sensor housing• DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12"): coated aluminum AlSi10Mg• DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"): carbon steel with protective varnish
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4301/304/1.4306/304L; for flanges made of carbon with Al/Zn
protective coating (DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")) or protective varnish (DN 350 to 600 (14 to
24"))
Liner
• PFA
• PTFE
Process connections
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Stainless steel, 1.4571 (F316L); carbon steel, FE410WB 1)/S235JRG2; Alloy C22, 2.4602(UNS N06022)
ASME B16.5
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105 1)
JIS B2220
Stainless steel, 1.0425 (F316L) 1); carbon steel, S235JRG2/HII
AS 2129 Table E• DN 25 (1"): carbon steel, A105/S235JRG2• DN 40 (1 ½"): carbon steel, A105/S275JR
AS 4087 PN 16
Carbon steel, A105/S275JRElectrodes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum; tantalum;
titanium
Seals
In accordance with DIN EN 1514-1
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

1)

DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12") with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24") with protective varnish

Endress+Hauser

185

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

External WLAN antenna• WLAN antenna:
ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter:
Stainless steel and copper
Ground disks
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum; titanium
Fitted electrodes

Measuring electrodes, reference electrodes and electrodes for empty pipe detection:• Standard: stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum,
titanium• Optional: only platinum measuring electrodes

Surface roughness

Stainless steel electrodes, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum;
tantalum; titanium:≤ 0.3 to 0.5 µm (11.8 to 19.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)
Liner with PFA:
≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)

16.11 Operability
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Arabic, Bahasa (Indonesian), Thai, Vietnamese, Czech,
Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Arabic, Bahasa (Indonesian), Thai, Vietnamese, Czech,
Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Two display modules are available:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, backlit, graphic display; touch
control"• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, backlit, graphic display; touch
control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  65

186

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

A0026785

 36

Operation with touch control

Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.
Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in various hazardous areas
Via remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Separate backlit, 4-line display; 10 m (30 ft)
Cable; touch control"
Another device version, e.g. other housing material, other cable length etc., can beordered via the separate product structure DKX001. The measuring device is ordered
with:Order code for "Display; operation", option M "None, prepared for remote display"

A0026786

 37

Endress+Hauser

Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

187

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Display and operating elements
The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module .
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is used. Display or operation at thetransmitter is not possible in this case.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 can also be ordered separately
and subsequently as an accessory without a measuring device →  164.
• If ordered subsequently: The remote display and operating module DKX001 cannot
be connected at the same time as the existing display or operation unit. Only one
display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one time.
Material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choiceof transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing

Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing"Material

Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated"

AlSi10Mg, coated

AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable→  32Dimensions
For the dimensions, see the "Technical Information" document, "Mechanicalconstruction" section.
Remote operation→  64Service interface→  65

Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.

188

Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with Web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
interface• WLAN interface

Special Documentation for thedevice →  195

DeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  165

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  165

Device Xpert

Field Xpert SFX
100/350/370

Operating Instructions
BA01202S

HART and
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
fieldbus protocol

Additional information

Device description files:
Use update function ofhandheld terminal

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• Asset Management Solutions (AMS) by Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com• FieldCommunicator 375/475 by Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →Downloads
Web serverThanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and themeasuring device:– Uploading the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)– Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)– Export event list (.csv file)– Export parameter settings (.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point
configuration)– Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)– Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance– Download driver for system integration
HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.

Endress+Hauser

189

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Additional information on the data storage concept
There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

Device memory

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event history, such as diagnostic
events• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Driver for system integration e.g.:
DD for FOUNDATION Fieldbus• Measured value memory ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (usedby firmware at run time)• Maximum indicators (min/max
values)• Totalizer values• Sensor data: diameter etc.
• Serial number• User-specific access code (to use the"Maintenance" user role)• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Can be plugged into the user interface
board in the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter neckpart

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in theconnection compartment

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors
ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory
Data transfer
ManualTransfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)
Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server

190

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels• User configurable recording interval• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server• Use the recorded measured value data in the integrated device simulation function in the
Diagnostics submenu (→  154).
Service logbook
Manual• Create up to 20 user-specific events with a date and customized text in a separate
logbook for documentation of the measuring point• Use for calibration or service operations, for example, or for maintenance or revision
work that has been performed

16.12 Certificates and approvals
CE mark

The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the applicable
EU Directives. These are listed in the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity alongwith the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

C-Tick symbol

The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval

The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions areprovided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to thisdocument on the nameplate.

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
certification

FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface

Radio approval

Europe:RED 2014/53/EU

The measuring device is certified and registered by the FieldComm Group. The measuringsystem meets all the requirements of the following specifications:• Certified in accordance with FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1• Interoperability Test Kit (ITK), revision version 6.2.0 (certificate available on request)• Physical Layer Conformance Test
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)

United States of America:
CFR Title 47, FCC Part 15.247
Canada:
RSS-247 Issue 1

Endress+Hauser

191

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Japan:
Article 2 clause 1 item 19
Additional country-specific approvals on request.

Other standards andguidelines• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.

192

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Diagnostics functions

Technical data

Package

Description

Extended HistoROM

Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of themeasured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

Heartbeat Technology

Package

Description

Heartbeat Verification+Monitoring

Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, toan external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on themeasuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.
Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.

Cleaning

Package

Description

Electrode cleaning circuit(ECC)

The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution
for applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hotwater). Since magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors
and ultimately to the loss of signal. The application package is designed to AVOID
build up of highly conductive matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  164

16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The W@M Device Viewer : Enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplateor scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

Endress+Hauser

193

Technical data

Standard documentation

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Brief Operating Instructions
Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline Promag P

KA01290D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 300

KA01294D

Technical Information
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag P 300

TI01224D

Description of device parameters

Supplementary devicedependent documentation

Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag 300

GP01098D

Safety instructions
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01414D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01514D

cCSAus XP

XA01515D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01516D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01517D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de

XA01518D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01519D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de

XA01520D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01521D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

194

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data

Special Documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763DHeartbeat Technology

SD01742D

Web server

SD01657D

Installation Instructions

Endress+Hauser

Contents

Documentation code

Installation Instructions for spare part sets Overview of accessories available for order →  164

195

Index

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Index
A

Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

C

C-Tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 191
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection examples, potential equalization . . . . 37, 38
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

D

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 178
196

Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Device documentation
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagnostic information
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
DIAGNOSTIC Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Diagnostics
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
DIP switches
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Displaysee Local display
Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 187
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

E

ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Electrical connection
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operating tools
Via FOUNDATION Fieldbus network . . . . . . . . 64
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Environment
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
Event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

F

Field Communicator
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Field Xpert
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Field Xpert SFX350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
FOUNDATION Fieldbus certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Function scope
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Endress+Hauser

Index

Functionssee ParameterG

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Information on the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inspection check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation conditions
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

K

Keypad lock
Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

L

Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

197

IndexM

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Measured values
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Measuring device
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 70
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 26
Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mounting dimensions
see Installation dimensions
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

O

Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

198

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 126
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Analog inputs (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electrode cleaning circuit (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 102
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) . . 85, 86, 89
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 117
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 117
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
WLAN Settings (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Parameters
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enter a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Process conditions
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SensorMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Endress+Hauser

Index

Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Restart device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 128
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Structure
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Submenu
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 98
Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Electrode cleaning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
199

Index

Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 117
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
WLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Symbols
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 47
In the text and numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
see Measuring device design
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

T

Technische Daten, Übersicht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 186
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tool tipsee Help text
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Totalizer
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Transmitter
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
200

Proline Promag P 300 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

U

Use of the measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
see Designated use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

V

Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

W

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 162
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 162
WeightTransport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WizardCurrent input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . 85, 86, 89
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Via block operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Endress+Hauser

www.addresses.endress.com